Container Refrigeration

OPERATIONS AND SERVICE

MANUAL
For
69NT40-601-100 to 199
Container Refrigeration Units

T-370 Rev F
 OPERATIONS AND SERVICE
MANUAL
For
69NT40-601-100 to 199

Container Refrigeration Units

© Carrier Corporation, 2021 Printed in U. S. A. October 2021

 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph Number Page

SAFETY SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1.1 GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.2 FIRST AID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.3 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.4 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.5 SPECIFIC WARNING AND CAUTION STATEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.6 LOCKOUT / TAGOUT (LO/TO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2 CONFIGURATION IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3 INSTALLATION GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4 FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.1 Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.2 Temperature Readout - Refrigerant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.3 Temperature Readout - Air Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.4 Pressure Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.5 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.6 Gas Cooler / Intercooler Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.7 Evaporator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.8 Flash Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.9 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.10 Interrogator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.11 Plate Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.5 OPTION DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.5.1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.5.2 Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.5.3 USDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.5.4 Remote Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.5.5 Communications Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.5.6 Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.5.7 Thermometer Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.5.8 Back Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.5.9 460 Volt Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.5.10 Cable Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.5.11 Vent Position Sensor (VPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.5.12 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.5.13 Gas Cooler / Intercooler Grille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4

i T-370
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.3 Evaporator Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.1.4 Compressor and Flash Tank Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.1.5 Gas Cooler / Intercooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.1.6 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3.1.7 Communications Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3.1.8 Water-Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3.2 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3.3 TORQUE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.4 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.5 SAFETY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
3.6 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
3.6.1 Standard Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
3.6.2 First Stage Discharge Port & Suction Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
3.6.3 Unloaded Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
3.6.4 Economized Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
3.6.5 Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
MICROPROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROL MICROPROCESSOR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1.1 Display Module and Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1.2 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.2 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.2.1 Configuration Variables (CnF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.2.2 Operational Software (Cd Function Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.3 CONTROLLER SEQUENCE AND MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.3.1 System Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.2 Perishable Mode Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.3 Perishable Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.4 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.3.5 Perishable Mode Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.3.6 Perishable Dehumidification - Bulb Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.3.7 Frozen Mode Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.3.8 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4.3.9 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.10 Defrost Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.11 Defrost Related Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.4 PROTECTION MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.4.1 Evaporator Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.4.2 Failure Action, Cd29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.4.3 Generator Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4.4.4 Compressor High Temperature, Low Pressure Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4.4.5 Compressor Internal Protector (IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4.5 CONTROLLER ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4.5.1 Displaying Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11

T-370 ii
 4.6 PRE-TRIP DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.6.1 Auto Test Operation from Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.6.2 Manual Test Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.6.3 Auto Test Operation from Serial Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.6.4 Terminating Pre-trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.6.5 Results Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.7 DATACORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.7.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.7.2 DataCORDER Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.7.3 Sensor Configuration (dCF02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.7.4 Logging Interval (dCF03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.7.5 Thermistor Format (dCF04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.7.6 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.7.7 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 - dCF10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
4.7.8 DataCORDER Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
4.7.9 Pre-Trip Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
4.7.10 DataCORDER Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
4.7.11 DataCORDER Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4.7.12 ISO Trip Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–19
4.7.13 USDA Cold Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–19
4.7.14 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
4.8 OPTIONAL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
4.8.1 Automatic Cold Treatment (ACT) Cd51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
4.8.2 Automatic Setpoint Change (ASC) Cd53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–23
4.9 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–24
4.10 CONTROLLER FUNCTION CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
4.11 CONTROLLER ALARM INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–33
4.12 CONTROLLER PRE-TRIP TEST CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–47
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2 CONNECT POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2.1 Connection To 380/460 VAC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.3 ADJUST FRESH AIR MAKEUP VENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.3.2 Vent Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.4 CONNECT WATER COOLED CONDENSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.5 CONNECT REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.5.1 Starting the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.5.2 Stopping the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.6 START-UP INSPECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.6.1 Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.6.2 Check Controller Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.6.3 DataCORDER Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.6.4 Complete Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.7 PRE-TRIP DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.7.1 Starting a Pre-Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.7.2 Displaying Pre-Trip Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6

iii T-370
 5.8 OBSERVE UNIT OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.8.1 Probe Diagnostic Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.1 UNIT WILL NOT START OR STARTS THEN STOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.2 UNIT OPERATES LONG OR CONTINUOUSLY IN COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.3 UNIT RUNS BUT HAS INSUFFICIENT COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.4 UNIT WILL NOT HEAT OR HAS INSUFFICIENT HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.5 UNIT WILL NOT TERMINATE HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.6 UNIT WILL NOT DEFROST PROPERLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.7 ABNORMAL PRESSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.8 ABNORMAL NOISE OR VIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.9 MICROPROCESSOR MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.10 NO EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW OR RESTRICTED AIR FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.11 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (EEV) MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.12 HIGH PRESSURE EXPANSION VALVE (HPXV) MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.13 ABNORMAL TEMPERATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.14 ABNORMAL CURRENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.15 FUSE F1 OR F2 BLOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.1 ANNUAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.2 SERVICE GAUGE SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.2.1 Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7.2.2 Connecting Service Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7.2.3 Removing Service Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.2.4 Manually Opening Solenoid Valves and High Pressure Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.2.5 Removing Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.2.6 Refrigerant Leak (Tightness) Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.2.7 Evacuation and Dehydration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.2.8 Charging, Vapor Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.3 COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
7.3.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
7.4 O-RING INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
7.4.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
7.4.2 Adding Loctite 55 Thread Sealing Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
7.5 HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.5.1 Checking a High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.5.2 Replacing a High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.6 PRESSURE TRANSDUCER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.6.1 Replacing a Pressure Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.7 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.7.1 Replacing a Pressure Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.8 GAS COOLER / INTERCOOLER COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.8.1 Gas Cooler Coil Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.8.2 Gas Cooler Coil Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.9 GAS COOLER FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.10 FILTER DRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.11 EVAPORATOR COIL ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.11.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14

T-370 iv
 7.12 EVAPORATOR HEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.12.1 Evaporator Heater Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.12.2 Megger Testing the Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7.13 EVAPORATOR FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.13.1 Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.13.2 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.13.3 Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7.14 EVAPORATOR SECTION CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7.15 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (EEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.15.1 Removing an EEV or HPXV: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.15.2 Installing an EEV or HPXV: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.16 HUMIDITY SENSOR (HS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.16.1 Checking the Operation of the Humidity Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.17 ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE, UNLOADER SOLENOID VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.17.1 Removing / Replacing the ESV or USV Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.17.2 Removing / Replacing the ESV or USV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.18 REMOVING / REPLACING THE FLASH TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.19 CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.19.1 Handling Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.19.2 Controller Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
7.19.3 Controller Programming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.19.4 Removing and Installing a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
7.19.5 Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
7.20 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
7.20.1 Remove and Replace Variable Frequency Drive Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
7.20.2 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
7.21 VENT POSITION SENSOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.21.1 Upper VPS Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.22 TEMPERATURE SENSOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.22.1 Ice Bath Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.22.2 Sensor Checkout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
7.22.3 GDP Supply and Return Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
7.22.4 Sensor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
7.22.5 Sensor STS and SRS Re-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
7.22.6 Sensors RRS and RTS Re-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
7.22.7 Sensor DTS Re-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
7.22.8 Sensors ETS1 Re-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
7.22.9 Sensor, CPDS Re-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
7.23 TRANSDUCER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
7.24 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
7.25 MAINTENANCE OF PAINTED SURFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
7.26 TEMPERATURE / PRESSURE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
7.27 BOLT TORQUE VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–47
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATIC AND DIAGRAMS ........................................ 8–1
EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1
INDEX .......................................................................... INDEX–1

v T-370
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE NUMBER Page

Figure 1.1 Lockout/Tagout ............................................................... 1–6

Figure 2.1 Unit Nameplate and PED Label Location ........................................... 2–1
Figure 2.2 Unit Nameplate ............................................................... 2–2
Figure 2.3 PED Label (from PID NT5010) ................................................... 2–2
Figure 3.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section ................................................. 3–1
Figure 3.2 Evaporator Section ............................................................ 3–2
Figure 3.3 Compressor and Flash Tank Section - PIDs lower than NT5010 ......................... 3–3
Figure 3.4 Compressor and Flash Tank Section - PIDs NT5010 and higher ......................... 3–4
Figure 3.5 Compressor Detail ............................................................. 3–5
Figure 3.6 Gas Cooler / Intercooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
Figure 3.7 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
Figure 3.8 Water-Cooled Condenser ....................................................... 3–8
Figure 3.9 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - PIDs lower than NT5010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
Figure 3.10 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - PIDs NT5010 and higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15
Figure 3.11 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic (WCC) - PIDs lower than NT5010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
Figure 3.12 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic (WCC) - PIDs NT5010 and higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
Figure 4.1 Temperature Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
Figure 4.2 Display Module ............................................................... 4–2
Figure 4.3 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
Figure 4.4 Control Module ............................................................... 4–3
Figure 4.5 Controller Operation - Perishable Mode ............................................ 4–6
Figure 4.6 Controller Operation - Frozen Mode ............................................... 4–8
Figure 4.7 DataCorder Configuration Screen ................................................ 4–20
Figure 4.8 DataCorder Probe Calibration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
Figure 4.9 DataCorder ISO Trip Header Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
Figure 4.10 DataCorder Systems Tool Screen ............................................... 4–21
Figure 4.11 Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence ............................................... 4–32
Figure 5.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Flow Chart ............................................... 5–2
Figure 7.1 Service Gauge Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
Figure 7.2 Refrigeration Evacuation & Charging Diagram - PIDs lower than NT5010 .................. 7–6
Figure 7.3 Refrigeration Evacuation & Charging Diagram - PIDs NT5010 and higher .................. 7–7
Figure 7.4 Compressor .................................................................. 7–8
Figure 7.5 O-Ring - Electrical Tape ....................................................... 7–10
Figure 7.6 O-Ring - Apply Super O-lube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
Figure 7.7 O-Ring - Slide On O-Ring ...................................................... 7–10
Figure 7.8 O-Ring - Remove Electrical Tape ................................................ 7–10
Figure 7.9 Loctite 55 - Twist Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
Figure 7.10 Loctite 55 - Locate Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
Figure 7.11 Loctite 55 - Wrap Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
Figure 7.12 Loctite 55 - Wrap Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
Figure 7.13 Loctite 55 - Trim Excess Cord .................................................. 7–11
Figure 7.14 Loctite 55 - Tighten Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11

T-370 vi
Figure 7.15 Heater Arrangement ......................................................... 7–14
Figure 7.16 Evaporator Fan Assembly ..................................................... 7–17
Figure 7.17 HPXV Coil Boot ............................................................. 7–19
Figure 7.18 HPXV Valve Body Dimples .................................................... 7–19
Figure 7.19 Coil View of Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) .................................... 7–22
Figure 7.20 Controller Section of the Control Box ............................................ 7–24
Figure 7.21 VFD Fan Screws ............................................................ 7–28
Figure 7.22 VFD Fan Removal ........................................................... 7–28
Figure 7.23 VFD Phase Wiring ........................................................... 7–29
Figure 7.24 DataLINE - Probe Calibration .................................................. 7–37
Figure 7.25 DataLINE - Calibrate Sensors Button ............................................ 7–37
Figure 7.26 DataLINE - Enter Service Information ............................................ 7–38
Figure 7.27 Ice Bath ................................................................... 7–38
Figure 7.28 DataLINE - Start Cal Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
Figure 7.29 DataLINE - Calibration Results ................................................. 7–39
Figure 7.30 Sensor Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
Figure 7.31 Sensor and Cable Splice ...................................................... 7–40
Figure 7.32 Supply Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
Figure 7.33 Return Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
Figure 7.34 Evaporator Temperature Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
Figure 7.35 Open End Wrench ........................................................... 7–43
Figure 7.36 Communications Interface Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
Figure 8.1 Schematic Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
Figure 8.2 Schematic Diagram - Standard Unit Configuration .................................... 8–2
Figure 8.3 Unit Wiring Diagram - Standard Unit Configuration Sheet 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
Figure 8.4 Unit Wiring Diagram -Standard Unit Configuration - Sheet 2 of 2 ......................... 8–4

vii T-370
 LIST OF TABLES
TABLE NUMBER Page

Table 3–1 Safety and Protective Devices ................................................... 3–12

Table 4–1 Display Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
Table 4–2 Keypad Function .............................................................. 4–2
Table 4–3 DataCORDER Configuration Variables ............................................ 4–16
Table 4–4 DataCORDER Standard Variables ............................................... 4–16
Table 4–5 DataCORDER Alarm Indications ................................................. 4–18
Table 4–6 Controller Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
Table 4–7 Controller Function Codes ...................................................... 4–26
Table 4–8 Controller Alarm Codes ........................................................ 4–33
Table 4–9 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments ........................................ 4–52
Table 4–10 DataCORDER Pre-Trip Result Records .......................................... 4–53
Table 7–1 Test Point Descriptions ........................................................ 7–24
Table 7–2 Sensor Resistance - AMBS, DTS, ETS, RRS, RTS, SRS, STS ......................... 7–34
Table 7–3 Sensor Resistance - CPDS ..................................................... 7–35
Table 7–4 R-744 Temperature - Pressure Chart ............................................. 7–44
Table 7–5 Recommended Bolt Torque Values (Dry, Non-Lubricated for 18-8 Stainless Steel) .......... 7–47

T-370 viii
 SECTION 1
SAFETY SUMMARY
1.1 General Safety Notices
The following general safety notices supplement specific warnings and cautions appearing elsewhere in this
manual. They are recommended precautions that must be understood and applied during operation and
maintenance of the equipment covered herein. The general safety notices are presented in the following three
sections labeled: First Aid, Operating Precautions and Maintenance Precautions. A listing of the specific warnings
and cautions appearing elsewhere in the manual follows the general safety notices.

1.2 First Aid

An injury, no matter how slight, should never go unattended. Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately.

1.3 Operating Precautions

Always wear safety glasses.

Keep hands, clothing and tools clear of the evaporator and gas cooler fans.

No work should be performed on the unit until all circuit breakers and start-stop switches are turned off, power
supply is disconnected, and Lock Out / Tag Out has been applied.

In case of severe vibration or unusual noise, stop the unit and investigate.

1.4 Maintenance Precautions

The Carrier NaturaLINE unit requires the same training and certifications that are required for servicing a
conventional refrigeration unit and it is expected that maintenance will only be performed by qualified personnel.

Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and gas cooler fans. Do not open the gas cooler fan grille or
evaporator access panels before turning power off, disconnecting and securing the power plug and performing the
Lock Out / Tag Out procedure at the end if the Safety Summary.

Be sure power is turned off before working on motors, controllers, solenoid valves and electrical control switches.
Lock Out / Tag Out the circuit breaker and power supply to prevent accidental energizing of circuit.

Do not bypass any electrical safety devices, e.g. bridging an overload, or using any sort of jumper wires. Problems
with the system should be diagnosed, and any necessary repairs performed by qualified service personnel.

When performing any arc welding on the unit or container, disconnect all wire harness connectors from the
modules in control boxes. Do not remove wire harness from the modules unless you are grounded to the unit frame
with a static safe wrist strap.

In case of electrical fire, open circuit switch and extinguish with CO2 (never use water).

1.5 Specific Warning And Caution Statements

To help identify the label hazards on the unit and explain the level of awareness each one carries, an explanation is
given with the appropriate consequences:

! DANGER
DANGER - means an immediate hazard that WILL result in severe personal injury or death.

! WARNING
WARNING - means to warn against hazards or unsafe conditions that COULD result in severe
personal injury or death.

1–1 T-370
 ! CAUTION
CAUTION - means to warn against potential hazard or unsafe practice that could result in
minor personal injury, product or property damage.

NOTICE
NOTICE - means to warn against potential product or property damage.
The following statements are applicable to the refrigeration unit and appear elsewhere in this manual. These
recommended precautions must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance of the equipment
covered herein.

! DANGER
Only manifold gauge sets designed and manufactured for R-744 (CO2) are to be used on these
units.

! DANGER
There are no serviceable parts on the Pressure Relief Valve (PRV). Attempting to repair or alter
the PRV is not permitted. If the PRV has released pressure, the entire PRV must be replaced.

! DANGER
There are no serviceable parts on the flash tank. Attempting to repair the flash tank or welding
on the flash tank vessel is not permitted. If the flash tank should be damaged in any way the
entire flash tank must be replaced.

! WARNING
Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and gas cooler fans. The unit may cycle the
fans and compressor unexpectedly as control requirements dictate.

! WARNING
Make sure that the unit circuit breaker (CB-1) and the START-STOP switch (ST) are in the “O”
(OFF) position before connecting to any electrical power source.

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breaker (CB-1), disconnect main power supply, and perform
Lock Out / Tag Out before working on moving parts.

! WARNING
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and power plug disconnected before replacing the
compressor.

T-370 1–2
 ! WARNING
Before disassembly of the compressor, be sure to relieve the internal pressure very carefully
by slightly loosening the couplings to break the seal.

! WARNING
Do not use a nitrogen or CO2 cylinder without a pressure regulator. Do not use oxygen in or
near a refrigeration system as an explosion may occur.

! WARNING
Do not open the Gas Cooler fan grille before turning power OFF, disconnecting power plug,
and performing Lock Out / Tag Out procedure.

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breaker (CB-1) and disconnect main power supply before
working on moving parts.

! WARNING
Installation requires wiring to the main unit circuit breaker, CB-1. Make sure the power to the
unit is off and power plug disconnected before beginning installation.

! WARNING
Do not use in a potentially explosive atmosphere.

! WARNING
Do not operate unit near flammable gases.

! WARNING
Do not use unit for any other use other than intermodal refrigerated transportation.

! WARNING
Any technical modifications to the unit must be performed using authorized service personnel.

! CAUTION
Charge according to nameplate specifications to ensure optimal unit performance.

! CAUTION
Use only thick walled tubing.

1–3 T-370
 ! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from controller modules unless you are grounded to the unit
frame with a static safe wrist strap.

! CAUTION
Unplug all controller module wire harness connectors before performing arc welding on any
part of the container.

! CAUTION
Do not attempt to use an ML2i PC card in an ML3 equipped unit. The PC cards are physically
different and will result in damage to the controller.

! CAUTION
Pre-trip diagnostics should not be performed with critical temperature cargoes in the container.

! CAUTION
When PRE-TRIP key is pressed, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode will be deactivated. At
the completion of Pre-trip activity, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated.

! CAUTION
When a failure occurs during automatic testing, the unit will suspend operation awaiting
operator intervention.

! CAUTION
When Pre-trip test Auto 2 runs to completion without being interrupted, the unit will terminate
Pre-trip and display “Auto 2” “end.” The unit will suspend operation until the user depresses
the ENTER key.

! CAUTION
To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in the manifold gauge set be sure that the set is isolated
from the system and pressure is released before disconnecting.

! CAUTION
Never use air or gases containing oxygen for leak testing or operating refrigerant
compressors. Pressurized mixtures of air or gases containing oxygen can lead to explosion.

! CAUTION
Opening the Manifold Gauge Valve wide open quickly can cause excessive noise and possible
loss of the system oil charge.

T-370 1–4
 ! CAUTION
Do not touch the filter drier to check for temperature difference while the unit is operating.
Refer to troubleshooting for when to replace the filter drier due to restriction.

! CAUTION
Unplug all module connectors before performing arc welding on any part of the container.

! CAUTION
The unit must be OFF whenever a programming card is inserted or removed from the controller
programming port.

! CAUTION
Use care when cutting wire ties to avoid nicking or cutting wires.

! CAUTION
Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice area as this may affect the sensor resistance.

! CAUTION
Variable Frequency Drive Electrical Hazard. After disconnecting from power supply, wait seven
minutes before servicing.

! CAUTION
Sound pressure level of 79dB(A) was measured at workstation.

! CAUTION
Operator needs to provide sufficient lighting when ambient light is low.

! CAUTION
Installation: Refrigeration unit must be inserted into the container so that all four flanges
contact the container at nearly the same time and no “wrenching” of the unit occurs. Inserting
the unit into the container while the unit remains tilted on forks so that one flange of the unit
hits hard against the container first can cause serious damage to the unit.

NOTICE
The NaturaLINE platform must use the green label controller only (part number 12-55011).

NOTICE
Compressor is shipped without oil in the compressor.

NOTICE
When installing service fittings and the suction pressure transducer, a new O-ring must
installed with each. See Section 7.4 for instructions on installing the O-rings.

1–5 T-370
1.6 Lockout / Tagout (LO/TO)
1. Shut down the unit by turning the START-STOP switch (SW) to the “O” (Off) position.
2. Ensure CB-1 (460V) circuit breaker is in the off position.
3. Disconnect, lock and tag the power plug using a plug clip or locking directly on the power cable (pic #1 & 2).
4. Remove and lock the battery connection (picture #3) for Genset units.
5. All employees working on the reefer must have their own personal lock in place.
6. Check that circuit−testing devices are working properly by using an energized test source.
7. Prior to servicing the unit, a check must be made with a “proximity voltage sensor” to ensure that the reefer
unit and the container body are not energized.
8. Verify the absence of electrical current or voltage with a circuit−testing device.

Figure 1.1 Lockout/Tagout

#1 #2 #3

T-370 1–6
 SECTION 2
INTRODUCTION
2.1 Introduction
The Carrier Transicold model 69NT40-601-XXX series units are of lightweight aluminum frame construction,
designed to fit in the front of a container and serve as the container’s front wall.

They are one piece, self-contained, all electric units, which include cooling and heating systems to provide precise
temperature control.

The units are supplied with a complete charge of refrigerant R-744 (CO2) and compressor lubricating oil. Units are
ready for operation upon installation.

The base unit operates on nominal 380/460 volt, 3-phase, 50/60 hertz (Hz) power. Power for the control system is
provided by a transformer which steps the supply power down to 18 and 24 volts, single phase.

The controller is a Carrier Transicold Micro-Link 3 microprocessor. The controller will operate automatically to
select cooling, holding or heating as required to maintain the desired set point temperature within very close limits.

The controller has a keypad and display for viewing or changing operating parameters. The display is also
equipped with lights to indicate various modes of operation.

2.2 Configuration Identification

Unit information is provided on a unit nameplate and PED label (see Figure 2.1) located to the right of the
compressor, on the side wall next to the Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) section. The nameplate provides the unit
model number, serial number and parts identification number (PID). The model number (69NT40-601-XXX)
identifies the overall unit configuration, while the PID number provides information on specific optional equipment,
factory provisioned to allow for field installation of optional equipment, and differences in detailed parts.

If a problem occurs, please refer to the information on this nameplate and make a note of the model and serial
number before calling for assistance. This information will be needed when you contact the technician so that he
may properly assist you.

Figure 2.1 Unit Nameplate and PED Label Location

Unit Nameplate
Carrier Transicold Pte Ltd
251 Jalan Ahmad Ibrahim
Singapore 629146

Model Number 69NT40-601-xxx Date of Manufacture:

xxxx LB Refrig: 9.5 LB
Parts ID Number: NTxxxx Dry Wt: R-744
xxxx KG Charge: 4.31 KG
Serial Number:

Voltage: 380/460 Phase: 3 Hertz: 50/60 Max Amp Draw: 25

Net Refrigeration Capacity: Interior Temperature: Ambient Temperature:

20500 BTU/HR 5995 Watts at 0 F / -17.8 C 100 F / 37.8 C
32000 BTU/HR 9358 Watts at 35 F / 1.7 C 100 F / 37.8 C

Item: Months: Warranty Period From Date In Service In Accordance With 62-02439-01
Except As Noted
Basic Unit: xx
Fan Motors: xx
Warranty Number: xxxxxxxxx
Compressor: xx

Place Date Label Here

MADE IN SINGAPORE

PED label

Container Refrigeration System xxxx

Fluid Group 2 (R744)

Units LS MS HS

Max Allowable Pressure Bar 89.6 108.2 150.9

Min Temp C -40

Max Temp C 65 135

PRV Set Pressure Bar 89.6 108.2 150.9

Test Pressure Bar 129 129 171

2–1 T-370
 Figure 2.2 Unit Nameplate

Carrier Transicold Pte Ltd

251 Jalan Ahmad Ibrahim
Singapore 629146

Model Number 69NT40-601-xxx Date of Manufacture:

xxxx LB Refrig: 9.5 LB
Parts ID Number: NTxxxx Dry Wt: R-744
xxxx KG Charge: 4.31 KG
Serial Number:

Voltage: 380/460 Phase: 3 Hertz: 50/60 Max Amp Draw: 25

Net Refrigeration Capacity: Interior Temperature: Ambient Temperature:

20500 BTU/HR 5995 Watts at 0 F / -17.8 C 100 F / 37.8 C
32000 BTU/HR 9358 Watts at 35 F / 1.7 C 100 F / 37.8 C

Item: Months: Warranty Period From Date In Service In Accordance With 62-02439-01
Except As Noted
Basic Unit: xx
Fan Motors: xx
Warranty Number: xxxxxxxxx
Compressor: xx

Place Date Label Here

MADE IN SINGAPORE

Figure 2.3 PED Label (from PID NT5010)

2.3 Installation Guidelines

1. Refrigeration unit is provided by Carrier Transicold. Dimensional outline is available upon request.
2. Installation and material guidelines are the responsibility of the container box manufacturer. Refer to the box
manufacturer for final instructions.

T-370 2–2
 ! CAUTION
Installation: Refrigeration unit must be inserted into the container so that all four flanges con-
tact the container at nearly the same time and no “wrenching” of the unit occurs. Inserting the
unit into the container while the unit remains tilted on forks so that one flange of the unit hits
hard against the container first can cause serious damage to the unit.

2.4 Feature Descriptions

2.4.1 Control Box
Units are equipped with a control box that may be fitted with a lockable door.

2.4.2 Temperature Readout - Refrigerant Temperature

The unit is fitted with a Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor (CPDS), an Evaporator Temperature Sensor
(ETS), and a Gas Cooler Temperature Sensor (GCTS).

2.4.3 Temperature Readout - Air Temperature

The unit is fitted with an Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS), a Return Temperature Sensor (RTS), a Return
Recorder Sensor (RRS), a Supply Temperature Sensor (STS), a Supply Recorder Sensor (SRS), and a Defrost
Temperature Sensor (DTS).

2.4.4 Pressure Readout

The unit is fitted with a Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT), a Flash Tank Pressure Transducer (FPT), and a
Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT).

2.4.5 Compressor
The unit is fitted with a reciprocating compressor equipped with suction, discharge and mid-stage connections.

2.4.6 Gas Cooler / Intercooler Coil

The unit is fitted with a three row Gas Cooler / Intercooler coil using heavy wall tubing.

2.4.7 Evaporator
The Evaporator section contains an evaporator coil and heaters, two three-phase fan motors, and is equipped with
an Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV). Opening of an evaporator fan internal protector will shut down the unit.

2.4.8 Flash Tank

The unit is fitted with a Flash Tank.

2.4.9 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

The unit is fitted with a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD).

2.4.10 Interrogator
Units that use the DataCORDER function are fitted with interrogator receptacles for connection of equipment to
download the recorded data. Two receptacles may be fitted; one is accessible from the front of the container and
the other is mounted inside the container (with the USDA receptacles).

2.4.11 Plate Set

Each unit is equipped with a tethered set of wiring schematics and wiring diagram plates. The plate sets are
ordered using a seven-digit base part number and a two-digit dash number.

2–3 T-370
2.5 Option Descriptions
Various options may be factory or field equipped to the base unit. These options are listed and described in the
following sub-paragraphs.

2.5.1 Battery
The refrigeration controller may be fitted with standard replaceable batteries or a rechargeable battery pack.
Rechargeable battery packs may be fitted in the standard or in a secure location.

2.5.2 Dehumidification
The unit may be fitted with a Humidity Sensor (HS). This sensor allows setting of a humidity set point in the
controller. In dehumidification mode, the controller will operate to reduce internal container moisture level.

2.5.3 USDA
The unit may be supplied with fittings for additional temperature probes, which allow recording of USDA Cold
Treatment data by the integral DataCORDER function of the Micro-Link refrigeration controller.

2.5.4 Remote Monitoring

The unit may be fitted with a remote monitoring receptacle. This item allows connection of remote indicators for
COOL, DEFROST and IN RANGE. Unless otherwise indicated, the receptacle is mounted at the control box location.

2.5.5 Communications Interface Module

The unit may be fitted with a communications interface module. The communications interface module is a slave
module, which allows communication with a master central monitoring station. The module will respond to
communication and return information over the main power line. Refer to the ship master system technical manual
for further information.

2.5.6 Handles
The unit may be equipped with handles to facilitate access to stacked containers. These fixed handles are located
on either side of the unit.

2.5.7 Thermometer Port

The unit may be fitted with ports in the front of the frame for insertion of a thermometer to measure supply and/or
return air temperature. If fitted, the port(s) will require a cap and chain.

2.5.8 Back Panels

Aluminum back panels may have access doors and/or hinge mounting.

2.5.9 460 Volt Cable

Various power cable and plug designs are available for the main 460 volt supply. The plug options tailor the cables
to each customer’s requirements.

2.5.10 Cable Restraint

Various designs are available for storage of the power cables. These options are variations of the compressor
section cable guard.

2.5.11 Vent Position Sensor (VPS)

The unit may be fitted with a fresh air makeup assembly, upper or lower. The fresh air makeup assembly is
available with a Vent Position Sensor (VPS) and may also be fitted with screens.

2.5.12 Labels
Safety instruction and function code listing labels differ, depending on the options installed. Labels available with
additional languages are listed in the parts list.

2.5.13 Gas Cooler / Intercooler Grille

The Gas Cooler / Intercooler grilles are direct bolted (standard) or hinged (option).

T-370 2–4
 SECTION 3
DESCRIPTION
3.1 General Description
3.1.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section
The refrigeration unit is designed so that the majority of components are accessible from the front (see Figure 3.1).

3.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent

The function of the upper fresh air makeup vent is to provide ventilation for commodities that require fresh air
circulation. The venting system / Vent Position Sensor (VPS) is located in the upper left access panel.

Figure 3.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section

3
17

6
16
7

15 8

10
14
13
12 11

1) Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent Panel. Located 9) Unit Nameplate: Serial Number, Model Number
inside are Evaporator Fan #2, Defrost Temperature and Parts Identification Number (PID)
Sensor (DTS) 10) Power Cables & Plug location
2) Access Panel. Located inside are Evaporator Fan 11) Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS)
#1, Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV), Heat Termi- 12) Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV)
nation Thermostat (HTT)
13) Compressor
3) Fork Lift Pockets
14) Flash Tank
4) Control Box
15) Filter Drier
5) Unit Display
16) Gas Cooler Fan
6) Key Pad
17) TIR (Transports Internationaux Routiers) Sealing
7) Interrogator Connector (Front right) Provisions - Typical All Panels
8) Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
-----

3–1 T-370
3.1.3 Evaporator Section
The two evaporator fans circulate air through the container by pulling air in from the top of the unit, directing the air
through the evaporator coil where it is cooled or heated, and then discharging the conditioned air at the bottom of
the unit.
Most evaporator components are accessible by removing the upper rear panel (as shown in Figure 3.2) or by
removing the evaporator fan access panels (see Figure 3.1).

Figure 3.2 Evaporator Section

3
15

2
1

14
13
12
11
10

5 6 7 8
9

1) Evaporator Fan Motor #1 (EM1) 8) Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS)

2) Evaporator Fan Motor #2 (EM2) 9) Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1)
3) Return Recorder Sensor (RRS) 10) Interrogator Connector (Rear) (ICR)
Return Temperature Sensor (RTS) 11) USDA Probe Receptacle PR2
4) Humidity Sensor (HS) 12) USDA Probe Receptacle PR1
5) Evaporator Coil 13) USDA Probe Receptacle PR3
6) Evaporator Coil Heaters (Underside of Coil) 14) Cargo Probe Receptacle PR4
7) Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT) 15) Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
-----

T-370 3–2
3.1.4 Compressor and Flash Tank Section

Figure 3.3 Compressor and Flash Tank Section - PIDs lower than NT5010

11 12 3

13

17

15

8 14

10 19,20

6 5 4 2 1 16 18

1) Compressor 11) Flash Tank Pressure Relief Valve (FTPRV)

2) Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor 12) Flash Tank Pressure Transducer (FPT)
(CPDS) 13) Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
3) High Pressure Relief Valve (HPRV) 14) Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV)
4) High Pressure Switch (HPS) 15) Low Pressure Relief Valve (LPRV)
5) Gas Cooler Temperature Sensor (GCTS) 16) Low Side Service Connection
6) High Side Service Connection 17) Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
7) Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) 18) Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS)
8) Filter Drier 19) Supply Recorder Sensor (SRS)
9) High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV) 20) Supply Temperature Sensor (STS)
10) Flash Tank
-----

3–3 T-370
 Figure 3.4 Compressor and Flash Tank Section - PIDs NT5010 and higher

11 12 5 3

13 16

17

15

8
14

10
19, 20

18

7 6 4 2 1

1) Compressor 11) Flash Tank Pressure Relief Valve (FTPRV)

2) Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor 12) Flash Tank Pressure Transducer (FPT)
(CPDS) 13) Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
3) High Pressure Relief Valve (HPRV) 14) Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV)
4) High Pressure Switch (HPS) 15) Low Pressure Relief Valve (LPRV)
5) Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) 16) Low Side Service Connection
6) Gas Cooler Temperature Sensor (GCTS) 17) Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
7) High Side Service Connection 18) Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS)
8) Filter Drier 19) Supply Recorder Sensor (SRS)
9) High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV) 20) Supply Temperature Sensor (STS)
10) Flash Tank
-----

T-370 3–4
 Figure 3.5 Compressor Detail

Compressor with sight glass

9
10

12
8

15
6 1
14

5
2
13
11
4 3

9 Compressor without sight glass

12

15 6

14 1

5
11 2

1) Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) 9) Cylinder Head

2) Compressor Terminal Box 10) Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
3) Moisture Indicator / Sight Glass (if equipped) 11) Suction Port / Flange
4) Oil Drain Port 12) Compressor Motor End Cover
5) Oil Pump 13) Service Connection, Suction
6) First Stage Discharge Port / Flange 14) Compressor Mounting Bolts
7) Second Stage Suction Port / Flange 15) Compressor Serial / Model Number Plate
8) Second Stage Discharge Port / Flange
-----

3–5 T-370
3.1.5 Gas Cooler / Intercooler
The gas cooler / intercooler coil acts as a heat exchanger in which compressed refrigerant gas from the
compressor is lowered in temperature as it circulates through the coil tubes. The gas cooler / intercooler fan pulls
external, ambient air through all four sides of the coil, heat from the refrigerant is transferred to the air, and then the
warm air is discharged horizontally through the front of the fan grille.

Figure 3.6 Gas Cooler / Intercooler

5
8

6 7

1) Gas Cooler Fan 5) Gas Cooler Inlet

2) Gas Cooler Fan Motor 6) Gas Cooler Outlet
3) Gas Cooler Coil 7) Intercooler Inlet
4) Gas Cooler Coil Cover 8) Intercooler Outlet
-----

T-370 3–6
3.1.6 Control Box Section

Figure 3.7 Control Box Section

2 3 4
1 5 6 7
8
9

19

20

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

1) Compressor Contactor - CH 11) Start - Stop Switch, ST

2) Phase A Contactor - PA 12) Interrogator Connector Box location
3) Phase B Contactor - PB 13) Control Transformer
4) Heater Contactor - HR 14) High Speed Evap. Fan Contactor - EF
5) Communications Interface Module 15) Low Speed Evap. Fan Contactor - ES
6) Controller / DataCORDER Module (Controller) 16) High Speed Gas Cooler Fan Contactor - GF
7) Variable Frequency Interface Module (VIM) 17) Low Speed Gas Cooler Fan Contactor - GS
8) Display Module 18) Circuit Breaker (CB-1) - 25 Amps
9) Keypad 19) Current Sensor Module
10) Controller Battery Pack standard location 20) Ferrite Core
-----

3.1.7 Communications Interface Module

The optional communications interface module (see Figure 3.7) is a slave module that allows communication with
a master central monitoring station. The module will respond to communication and return information over the
main power line. Refer to the master central monitoring station technical manual for additional information.

3–7 T-370
3.1.8 Water-Cooled Condenser Section
The water-cooled condenser section (Figure 3.8) consists of a water-cooled condenser, water couplings, and a
water pressure switch.

Figure 3.8 Water-Cooled Condenser

1) Water-Cooled Condenser 3) Self Draining Coupling (Water Out)

2) Coupling (Water In) 4) Water Pressure Switch (WP)
-----

3.2 Refrigeration System Data

Compressor / Motor Assembly Weight (With Oil) 158 kg (348 lb)

Carrier P/N 46-00025-06
Approved Oil
Idemitsu FVC 100D
Oil Charge 2000 ml (67 ounces)
The oil level range, while the unit
Oil Sight Glass (Service
operating, should be between 1/4 and 3/4
Compressor Only)
level of the sight glass.
Electronic Expansion Valve
Variable
Superheat (Evaporator)
High Pressure Expansion Valve
Variable
(HPXV)
Heater Termination Thermostat Opens 54°(+/- 3) C = 130°(+/- 5) F
(HTT) Closes 38°(+/- 4) C = 100°(+/- 7) F
Cut-Out 138 (+7/-11) bar = 2000 (+100/-156) psig
High Pressure Switch (HPS)
Cut-In 99 (+/- 10) bar = 1430 (+/- 140) psig

! CAUTION
Charge according to nameplate specifications to ensure optimal unit performance.

T-370 3–8
 Unit Configuration Charge Requirements

Refrigerant Charge - R-744 99.9% pure CO2 with

For servicing, charge to 9.5 lbs / 4.31kg.
maximum 10 ppm of water
Also refer to nameplate, see Figure 2.2
(AHRI 700)
PIDs lower than NT5010
Pressure Relief Valves - Set
Pressure Opens, Low Side 89.6 bar = 1300 psig
Opens, Flash Tank 108.2 bar = 1569 psig
Opens, High Side 150.9 bar = 2189 psig
PIDs NT5010 and higher
Opens, Low Side 89.6 bar = 1300 psig
Opens, Flash Tank 117.2 bar = 1700 psig
Opens, High Side 150.9 bar = 2189 psig
Unit Weight Refer to nameplate, see Figure 2.2
Cut-In 0.5 + 0.2 kg/cm3 (7 + 3 psig)
Water Pressure Switch (WP)
Cut-Out 1.6 + 0.4 kg/cm3 (22 + 5 psig)

3.3 Torque Requirements

Pressure Relief Valves PIDs lower than NT5010

Low Side Pressure Relief Valve (LPRV) 88.1-96.3 Nm (65-71 ft-lb)

Flash Tank Pressure Relief Valve (FTPRV) 29.8-32.5 Nm (22-24 ft-lb)

High Side Pressure Relief Valve (HPRV) 51.5-56.9 Nm (38-42 ft-lb)

PIDs NT5010 and higher

Low Side Pressure Relief Valve (LPRV) 77.3-85.4 Nm (57-63 ft-lb)

Flash Tank Pressure Relief Valve (FTPRV) 29.8-32.5 Nm (22-24 ft-lb)

High Side Pressure Relief Valve (HPRV) 51.5-56.9 Nm (38-42 ft-lb)

Pressure Transducers PIDs lower than NT5010

Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT) 25.7-28.5 Nm (19-21 ft-lb)

Flash Tank Pressure Transducer (FPT) 9.5-12.2 Nm (7-8 ft-lb)

Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) 9.5-12.2 Nm (7-8 ft-lb)

3–9 T-370
 Service Fittings / Service PIDs lower than NT5010
Valves
Suction Service Fitting 25.7-28.5 Nm (19-21 ft-lb)

Discharge Service Fitting 9.5-12.2 Nm (7-8 ft-lb)

PIDs NT5010 and higher
Suction or Discharge Service Valve
Top Cap 10-14 Nm (7-10 ft-lb)
Stem, Open Max. 2 Nm (1.5 ft-lb)
Stem, Closed 6-8 Nm (4-6 ft-lb)
Flare Cap 10-14 Nm (7-10 ft-lb)
Filter Drier Filter Drier 18.4-22.1 Nm (25-30 ft-lb)
Pressure Switch High Pressure Switch 17.6-19 Nm (13-14 ft-lb)
Bolts Compressor Flange Bolts 35.3-38 Nm (26-28 ft-lb)

3.4 Electrical System Data

Circuit Breaker CB-1 25 amps

Compressor Motor Full Load Amps (FLA) 13 amps @ 460 VAC
Nominal Supply 380 VAC, 3 Phase, 460 VAC, 3 Phase,
50 Hz +/- 2.5% Hz 60 Hz +/- 2.5% Hz
Full Load Amps, High Speed 1.10 amps 1.20 amps
Full Load Amps, Low Speed 0.68 amps 0.69 amps
Horsepower, High Speed 0.35 hp 0.60 hp
Horsepower, Low Speed 0.04 hp 0.06 hp
Gas Cooler Fan Motor
RPM, High Speed 1450 rpm 1725 rpm
RPM, Low Speed 700 rpm 825 rpm
Voltage 360 - 460 VAC 400 - 500 VAC
Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not
required.
Rotation Counter-clockwise when viewed from shaft end.
Number of Heaters 6
Rating 750 watts +/- 5% each @ 230 VAC
Evaporator Coil Heaters
Resistance (cold) 72 ohms +/- 5% @ 20°C (68°F)
Type Sheath

T-370 3–10
 Nominal Supply 380 VAC, 3 Phase, 460 VAC, 3 Phase,
50 Hz +/- 2.5% Hz 60 Hz +/- 2.5% Hz
Full Load Amps High Speed 1.07 0.9
Full Load Amps Low Speed 0.47 0.47
Nominal Horsepower High 0.36 0.63
Speed
Evaporator Fan Motors
Nominal Horsepower Low Speed 0.05 0.08
Rotations Per Minute High Speed 2850 rpm 3450 rpm
Rotations Per Minute Low Speed 1425 rpm 1725 rpm
Voltage 360 - 460 VAC 400 - 500 VAC
Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required
Rotation CW when viewed from shaft end
Control Circuit 7.5 amps (F3A, F3B)
Fuses
Controller / DataCORDER 5 amps (F1, F2)
Electrical Output 0.5 VDC to 4.5 VDC over 90 degree range
Vent Position Sensor
Supply Voltage 5 VDC +/- 10%
(VPS)
Supply Current 5 mA (typical)
Nominal Resistance @ 20° C 12.4 ohms +/- 5%
Solenoid Valve Coils (68°F)
(ESV/USV) 24 VAC
Maximum Current Draw 0.7 amps
Electronic Expansion Nominal Resistance 100 ohms A-B and C-D
Valve (EEV) Supply Voltage 12 VDC +/- 10%
30 ohms from Ground / Common 1 to 2, 3, 4 and
High Pressure Expansion Nominal Resistance 5 on the KE plug
Valve (HPXV)
Supply Voltage 12 VDC +/- 10%
Variable Frequency Drive
460 Volts Variable Frequency
(VFD)
Orange wire Power
Red wire Output
Brown wire Ground
Input voltage 5 VDC
Output voltage 0 to 3.3 VDC
Humidity Sensor (HS)
Output voltage readings verses relative humidity (RH) percentage:
30% 0.99 V
50% 1.65 V
70% 2.31 V
90% 2.97 V
Controller Setpoint Range -40 to +30°C (-40 to +86°F)

3–11 T-370
3.5 Safety and Protective Devices
Unit components are protected from damage by safety and protective devices listed in Table 3–1. These devices
monitor the unit operating conditions and open a set of electrical contacts when an unsafe condition occurs.
Open safety switch contacts on either or both of devices IP-CP or HPS will shut down the compressor.
Open safety switch contacts on device IP-CM will shut down the Gas Cooler fan motor.
The entire refrigeration unit will shut down if one of the following safety devices open: (a) circuit breaker(s); (b) fuse
(F3A / F3B, 7.5A); or (c) evaporator fan motor internal protector(s) - (IP).

Table 3–1 Safety and Protective Devices

Unsafe Condition Device Device Setting

Excessive current draw Circuit Breaker (CB-1) - Manual Trips at 25 amps (460 VAC)
Reset

Excessive current draw in the Fuse (F3A & F3B) 7.5 amp rating
control circuit

Excessive current draw by the Fuse (F1 & F2) 5 amp rating
controller Fuse

Excessive Gas Cooler fan motor Internal Protector (IP-CM) - N/A

winding temperature Automatic Reset

Excessive compressor motor Internal Protector (IP-CP) - N/A

winding temperature Automatic Reset

Excessive evaporator fan motor(s) Internal Protector(s) (IP-EM) - N/A

winding temperature Automatic Reset

Low Side PRV 89.6 bar = 1300 psig

Abnormal pressures in the
Flash Tank PRV 108.2 bar = 1569 psig
refrigerant system
High Side PRV 150.9 bar = 2189 psig

High Pressure Switch (HPS), Cut- 138 (+7/-11) bar

Out = 2000 (+100/-156) psig
Abnormally high discharge pressure
High Pressure Switch (HPS), Cut-In 99 (+/- 10) bar
= 1430 (+/- 140) psig

3.6 Refrigeration Circuit

The NaturaLINE unit operates as a vapor compression refrigeration system using R-744 (CO2) as the refrigerant.
The main components of the system are a Reciprocating Compressor, Gas Cooler/Intercooler, High Pressure
Expansion Valve (HPXV), Flash Tank, Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV), Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV),
Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV) and an Evaporator.
The refrigeration system operates in one of three modes; Standard, Unloaded, or Economized. At system start up,
and during periods of low refrigeration load, the unit will operate in Unloaded Mode. This allows the microprocessor
to place the system in operation at reduced capacity in order to measure the actual load. If the microprocessor
determines that further capacity is required, such as periods of high load or pull down, the system will transition to
Economized Mode. Standard Mode is used to maintain temperature during stable load conditions.

3.6.1 Standard Mode

At the compressor, the CO2 refrigerant is drawn in at the suction port and compressed into a higher pressure,
higher temperature gas. The compressed gas exits the first stage of the Compressor, enters the Intercooler, then
returns back to the Compressor at the second stage suction port, where the gas is compressed to a higher
pressure and higher temperature. The compressed gas then exits the Compressor at the discharge port and flows
through the Gas Cooler. Discharge temperature of the refrigerant is continuously monitored by the Compressor
Discharge Temperature Sensor (CPDS).

T-370 3–12
As refrigerant travels through the tubes in the Gas Cooler, ambient air flowing across the coil fins and tubes
removes heat from the refrigerant gas. As heat from the refrigerant is transferred to the ambient air, the refrigerant
gas cools and then passes through the Filter Drier. The Filter Drier ensures that the refrigerant is clean and dry.
The flow of refrigerant from the Filter Drier to the Flash Tank is regulated by the High Pressure Expansion Valve
(HPXV). The HPXV is controlled by the operating software for optimal performance and efficiency. As the
microprocessor receives temperature and pressure data, the HPXV stepper motor will open or close in order to
control and maintain maximum system efficiency. As refrigerant flows through the variable orifice of the HPXV, the
reduced pressure causes the refrigerant to flash (flash gas) while entering the Flash Tank. In the Flash Tank, vapor
and liquid are separated.
The liquid refrigerant from the Flash Tank continues through the liquid line to the Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV).
The EEV is used to control the superheat of the refrigerant leaving the Evaporator. As the microprocessor receives
suction pressure and temperature data, the microprocessor transmits electronic pulses to the EEV stepper motor
which opens or closes the variable valve orifice in order to control and maintain proper superheat. Superheat is
controlled to ensure that liquid refrigerant never enters the compressor.
The liquid refrigerant flows through the Evaporator, absorbing heat from the return air as the return air flows across
the fins and tubes of the Evaporator coil. As the liquid refrigerant in the Evaporator coil absorbs heat, the
refrigerant vaporizes, and the vapor flows through the suction port back to the compressor.

3.6.2 First Stage Discharge Port & Suction Port

The high pressure, high temperature refrigerant that is discharged from the first stage discharge port flows directly
to the Intercooler section of the Gas Cooler / Intercooler. As the refrigerant travels through the tubes in the
Intercooler, ambient air flowing across the coil fins and tubes removes heat, cooling but not condensing the gas.
The refrigerant leaving the Intercooler flows to three locations: the check valve (where it is stopped), the Unloader
Solenoid Valve (USV) (which is normally closed in Standard and Economized Mode), and to the mid-stage suction
port where refrigerant returns to the Compressor.

3.6.3 Unloaded Mode

During system start up and periods of low cooling load, the unit will operate in Unloaded Mode to conserve energy.
In Unloaded Mode, the normally closed USV opens. While in Unloaded Mode, a portion of the refrigerant leaving
the Intercooler is redirected to the suction port, back to the Compressor. The remaining portion of the refrigerant
leaving the Intercooler continues to the second stage suction port. To further reduce cooling, the Variable
Frequency Drive (VFD) may reduce Compressor speed.

3.6.4 Economized Mode

In Economized Mode, the main refrigeration system operates the same as in Standard Mode, except the
microprocessor energizes (opens) the Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV). When the ESV is open, frozen and pull
down capacity of the unit is increased by allowing refrigerant vapor to flow from the Flash Tank through the check
valve, and to the mid-stage suction port where the refrigerant returns to the Compressor. During Economized
Mode, the USV will remained closed.

3.6.5 Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)

The microprocessor controls the superheat of refrigerant leaving the evaporator by opening and closing the
variable orifice in the EEV. The microprocessor transmits electronic pulses to the EEV stepper motor, which opens
or closes the valve orifice to maintain superheat. EEV control is based on inputs from the Suction Pressure
Transducer (SPT) and the Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS).

3–13 T-370
 Figure 3.9 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - PIDs lower than NT5010

17

16

6
18

11 15 14

23 4

21 20
5 3

10
19
1
13 7
12
23
9 8
22

1) Compressor 13) Flash Tank Pressure Relief Valve (FTPRV)

2) Intercooler 14) Flash Tank Pressure Transducer (FPT)
3) Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor 15) Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
(CPDS) 16) Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
4) High Pressure Relief Valve (HPRV) 17) Evaporator
5) High Pressure Safety Switch (HPS) 18) Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS)
6) Gas Cooler 19) Low Pressure Relief Valve (LPRV)
7) Gas Cooler Temperature Sensor (GCTS) 20) Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV)
8) Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) 21) Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT), located on
9) High Side Service Fitting back of compressor
10) Filter Drier 22) Low Side Service Fitting
11) High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV) 23) Filter Screens
12) Flash Tank
-----

T-370 3–14
 Figure 3.10 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - PIDs NT5010 and higher

17

16

6
18

14 8
21
22 19
11 15

23 4

20
5 3

10
1
12 13
23 7

1) Compressor 12) Flash Tank

2) Intercooler 13) Flash Tank Pressure Relief Valve (FTPRV)
3) Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor 14) Flash Tank Pressure Transducer (FPT)
(CPDS) 15) Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
4) High Pressure Relief Valve (HPRV) 16) Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
5) High Pressure Safety Switch (HPS) 17) Evaporator
6) Gas Cooler 18) Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS)
7) Gas Cooler Temperature Sensor (GCTS) 19) Low Pressure Relief Valve (LPRV)
8) Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) 20) Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV)
9) High Side Service Valve 21) Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
10) Filter Drier 22) Low Side Service Valve
11) High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV) 23) Filter Screens
-----

3–15 T-370
 Figure 3.11 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic (WCC) - PIDs lower than NT5010

19

18

8
20

13 17 16

25 4

23 22
5 3

12
21
1
15
14 9

11 10 6
24
7

Water In 25 Water Out

1) Compressor 13) High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV)

2) Intercooler 14) Flash Tank
3) Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor 15) Flash Tank Pressure Relief Valve (FTPRV)
(CPDS) 16) Flash Tank Pressure Transducer (FPT)
4) High Side Pressure Relief Valve (HPRV) 17) Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
5) High Pressure Safety Switch (HPS) 18) Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
6) Water Cooled Condenser (WCC) 19) Evaporator
7) Water Pressure Switch (WPS) 20) Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS)
8) Gas Cooler 21) Low Side Pressure Relief Valve (LPRV)
9) Gas Cooler Temperature Sensor (GCTS) 22) Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV)
10) Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) 23) Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
11) High Side Service Fitting 24) Low Side Service Fitting
12) Filter Drier 25) Filter Screens
-----

T-370 3–16
 Figure 3.12 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic (WCC) - PIDs NT5010 and higher

19

18

8
20

2
16 10 24
23
21
13 17
25

25 4

22
5 3

12

1
14 15
9
6

11
7

Water In 25 Water Out

1) Compressor 13) High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV)

2) Intercooler 14) Flash Tank
3) Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor 15) Flash Tank Pressure Relief Valve (FTPRV)
(CPDS) 16) Flash Tank Pressure Transducer (FPT)
4) High Side Pressure Relief Valve (HPRV) 17) Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
5) High Pressure Safety Switch (HPS) 18) Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
6) Water Cooled Condenser (WCC) 19) Evaporator
7) Water Pressure Switch (WPS) 20) Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS)
8) Gas Cooler 21) Low Side Pressure Relief Valve (LPRV)
9) Gas Cooler Temperature Sensor (GCTS) 22) Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV)
10) Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) 23) Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
11) High Side Service Valve 24) Low Side Service Valve
12) Filter Drier 25) Filter Screens
-----

3–17 T-370
 SECTION 4
MICROPROCESSOR
4.1 Temperature Control Microprocessor System
The temperature control Micro-Link 3 microprocessor system (see Figure 4.1) consists of a keypad, display module,
the control module (controller) and interconnecting wiring. The controller houses the temperature control software and
the DataCORDER software. The temperature control software functions to operate the unit components as required to
provide the desired cargo temperature and humidity. The DataCORDER software functions to record unit operating
parameters and cargo temperature parameters for future retrieval. Coverage of the temperature control software
begins with Section 4.2. Coverage of the DataCORDER software is provided in Section 4.7.

Figure 4.1 Temperature Control System

4.1.1 Display Module and Keypad

The display module and keypad serve to provide user access and readouts for both of the controller functions, tem-
perature control and DataCORDER. The functions are accessed by keypad selections and viewed on the display
module.
The display module (see Figure 4.2) consists of two 5-digit displays and seven indicator lights. Descriptions of the
indicator lights are provided in Figure 4–1. The keypad (see Figure 4.3) consists of eleven push button switches
that act as the user’s interface with the controller. Description of the switch functions are provided in Figure 4–2.

4–1 T-370
 Figure 4.2 Display Module Figure 4.3 Keypad

CODE PRE
SELECT TRIP

MANUAL
ALARM
DEFROST/
LIST
INTERVAL

ENTER

RETURN C
SUPPLY F

BATTERY ALT
POWER MODE

Table 4–1 Display Module LEDs Table 4–2 Keypad Function

Light Function Key Function
COOL Energized when the refrigerant CODE SELECT Access function codes.
(White / Blue) compressor is energized.
PRE-TRIP Display Pre-trip selection menu.
HEAT Energized to indicate heater operation in Discontinue Pre-trip in progress.
(Orange) heat mode, defrost mode, or
ALARM LIST Display alarm list and clear alarm queue.
dehumidification.
MANUAL Display selected defrost mode. Press
DEFROST Energized when the unit is in defrost
DEFROST / and hold this key for five seconds to
(Orange) mode.
INTERVAL initiate defrost using same logic as if the
IN RANGE Energized when the controlled optional manual defrost switch was
(Green) temperature probe is within specified toggled on.
tolerance of setpoint. The controlling
ENTER Confirm a selection or save a selection to
probe in perishable range is the SUPPLY
the controller.
air probe and in frozen range is the
RETURN air probe. Arrow Up Change or scroll a selection up. Pre-trip
advance or test interrupt.
SUPPLY Energized when the supply air probe is
(Yellow) used for control. When this LED is Arrow Down Change or scroll selection down. Pre-trip
illuminated, the temperature displayed in repeat backward.
the AIR TEMPERATURE display is the
reading at the supply air probe. This LED RETURN / Display non-controlling probe
will flash if dehumidification or SUPPLY temperature (momentary display).
humidification is enabled. °C / °F Display alternate english / metric scale
RETURN Energized when the return air probe is (momentary display). When set to F,
(Yellow) used for control. When this LED is pressure is displayed in psig and vacuum
illuminated, the temperature displayed in in “/hg.” “P” appears after the value to
the AIR TEMPERATURE display is the indicate psig and “i” appears for inches of
reading at the return air probe. mercury. When set to C, pressure
readings are in bars. “b” appears after the
ALARM Energized when an active or inactive value to indicate bars.
(Red) shutdown alarm is in the alarm queue.
BATTERY Initiate battery backup mode to allow
POWER setpoint & function code selection if AC
power is not connected.
ALT MODE Switch the functions from temperature
software to DataCORDER software. The
remaining keys function the same as
described above except the readings or
changes are made to the DataCORDER
programming.

T-370 4–2
4.1.2 Controller

! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from controller modules unless you are grounded to the unit
frame with a static safe wrist strap.

! CAUTION
Unplug all controller module wire harness connectors before performing arc welding on any
part of the container.

! CAUTION
Do not attempt to use an ML2i PC card in an ML3 equipped unit. The PC cards are physically
different and will result in damage to the controller.

NOTICE
Do not attempt to service the controller modules. Breaking the seal will void the warranty.

The Micro-Link 3 controller is a dual module microprocessor as shown in Figure 4.4. It is fitted with test points, har-
ness connectors and a software card programming port.

Figure 4.4 Control Module

1 2 3 3 4 5 3 6 7 3 8 3

EN12830
CONTROLLER With
(7.5A)

(7.5A)

KB
OC1
(5A)

(5A)

F3A

F3B

KA
MC
MA

MB

CARRIER
KH
TP
F2

F1

Micro-Link3 DataCORDER S/N: 0491162 REV 5147 YYWW:

T B C1 KD
1035 12-00579-00
KC 59980
KE

1) Mounting Screw 5) Fuses

2) Micro-Link 3 Control/DataCORDER Module 6) Control Circuit Power Connection
3) Connectors 7) Software / Programming Slot
4) Test Points 8) Battery Pack (Standard Location)
-----

4–3 T-370
4.2 Controller Software
The controller software is a custom designed program that is subdivided into configuration software and opera-
tional software. The controller software performs the following functions:
• Control supply or return air temperature to required limits, provide modulated refrigeration operation, econo-
mized operation, unloaded operation, electric heat control and defrost. Defrost is performed to clear buildup
of frost and ice in order to ensure proper air flow across the evaporator coil.
• Provide default independent readouts of setpoint and supply or return air temperatures.
• Provide ability to read and (if applicable) modify the configuration software variables (CnF, see Table 4–6),
operating software function codes (Cd, see Table 4–7) and alarm code (AL, see Table 4–8) indications.
• Provide a Pre-trip step by step checkout of refrigeration unit performance including: proper component oper-
ation, electronic and refrigeration control operation, heater operation, probe calibration, pressure limiting and
current limiting settings. See Section 4.12.
• Provide battery-powered ability to access or change selected codes and setpoint without AC power connected.
• Provide the ability to reprogram the software through the use of a memory card.

4.2.1 Configuration Variables (CnF)

The configuration software is a variable listing of the components available for use by the operational software.
This software is factory installed in accordance with the equipment fitted and options listed on the original purchase
order. Changes to the configuration software are required only when a new controller has been installed or a phys-
ical change has been made to the unit such as the addition or removal of an option. A configuration variable list is
provided in Table 4–6. Change to the factory-installed configuration software is achieved via a configuration card or
by communications.

4.2.2 Operational Software (Cd Function Codes)

The operational software is the actual operation programming of the controller which activates or deactivates com-
ponents in accordance with current unit operating conditions and operator selected modes of operation.
The programming is divided into function codes. Some of the codes are read only while the remaining codes may
be user configured. The value of the user configurable codes can be assigned in accordance with user desired
mode of operation. A list of the function codes is provided in Table 4–7.
To access the function codes, perform the following:
1. Press the CODE SELECT key, then press an Arrow key until the left window displays the desired code.
2. The right window will display the value of this code for five seconds before returning to normal display mode.
3. If a longer time is desired, press the ENTER key to extend the time to five minutes.

4.3 Controller Sequence And Modes Of Operation

NOTICE
Compressor Contactor is always ON. The compressor speed is determined by specific operat-
ing conditions then the Micro will send commands to the Variable Frequency Drive.

General operation sequences for cooling, heating and defrost are provided in the following sub-paragraphs. Sche-
matic representation of controller action is provided in Figure 4.5.
The operational software responds to various inputs. These inputs come from the temperature and pressure sensors,
the temperature setpoint, the settings of the configuration variables and the function code assignments. The action
taken by the operational software will change if any one of the inputs change. Overall interaction of the inputs is
described as a “mode” of operation. The modes of operation include perishable (chill) mode and frozen mode.
Descriptions of the controller interaction and modes of operation are provided in the following sub paragraphs.

T-370 4–4
4.3.1 System Start Up
At start up, the controller logic checks for proper phase sequencing and compressor rotation. If incorrect sequenc-
ing is causing the compressor and three-phase evaporator and condenser fan motors to rotate in the wrong direc-
tion, the controller will energize or de-energize relay TCP as required (see Figure 8.2). Relay TCP will switch its
contacts, energizing or de-energizing relays PA and PB. Relay PA is wired to energize the circuits on L1, L2 and
L3. Relay PB is wired to energize the circuits on L3, L2, and L1, thus providing reverse rotation.
Upon start up, valves are opened to allow for equalization of system pressures. As the start up procedure transi-
tions to control mode, the evaporator and gas cooler fans cycle on, the Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) will ener-
gize, and the compressor and Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) ramp up.
During normal operation of the refrigeration system, system pressures and suction superheat are controlled by pre-
determined algorithms within the software. Temperature control is maintained by VFD speed and cycling of the gas
cooler fan (high / low / off).

4.3.2 Perishable Mode Temperature Control

NOTICE
In the Standard Perishable Mode of Operation, the evaporator fan motors run in high speed.

In Perishable Mode, the yellow SUPPLY indicator light is illuminated on the display module, the default reading on
the display window reflects the Supply Temperature Sensor (STS) reading, and the controller maintains supply air
temperature to setpoint. When supply air temperature reaches the In-Range Tolerance (Cd30), the green IN
RANGE light will energize.

The unit will be in Perishable Mode whenever setpoint is higher than -10°C (+14°F) [-5°C (+23°F) depends upon
the CnF26 (Heat Lockout Change Option) setting].

When operating in Perishable Mode, the microprocessor continuously controls the system in an effort to maintain
supply air temperature within the perishable limit of +/-0.25°C. In Perishable Mode, capacity reduction controls may
be implemented to ensure that the refrigeration system (compressor) does not shut down. Capacity reduction mea-
sures include modulation of the Gas Cooler Fan speed (high, low, off), closing of the ESV, opening of the USV, and
VFD speed reduction. After all of the capacity reduction measures have been implemented, if the temperature con-
tinues to fall below the control limit, the unit will turn off the refrigeration circuit (compressor) and run with evapora-
tor fans only. If the temperature continues to fall below setpoint, the unit will engage the heaters to maintain
temperature within the control band.

4.3.3 Perishable Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation

a. When the supply air temperature is above setpoint and decreasing, the unit will energize the compressor
contactor (CH), gas cooler fan motor / (GF), Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV), evaporator fan motors (EM)
/ high speed contactor (EF), and the white COOL light is energized. If pressure limiting is not active, the con-
troller will close contacts TS to open the Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV), placing the unit in economized
operation.
b. When the supply air temperature decreases to a predetermined tolerance (Cd30) above setpoint, the green
IN RANGE light is energized.
c. As the supply air temperature continues to fall, VFD speed reduction will reduce compressor speed, and the
ESV will be closed, taking the system out of economized operation. As supply air temperature approaches
setpoint, the controller will cycle the gas cooler fan on/off.
d. As the controller continuously monitors supply air temperature, calculations are performed to determine
temperature drift from setpoint over time. If the calculations determine that cooling is no longer required, the
compressor will cycle off, and the white COOL light is de-energized.
e. Evaporator fan motors will continue to operate in order to circulate air throughout the container. The green
IN RANGE light will remain energized as long as the supply air temperature is maintained within tolerance of
setpoint.

4–5 T-370
 Figure 4.5 Controller Operation - Perishable Mode

Perishable Mode Pull Down

(Only Applicable to Perishable Mode)
Controller Set Point ABOVE ï10qC (+14qF),
Controller Set Point ABOVE ï10qC (+14qF),
orï5qC (+23qF) optionally
orï5qC (+23qF) optionally

+2.5qC
(+4.5qF)
Cooling, Cooling,
Unloaded Economized
+.25qC

Set
ï.25qC Cooling, Point
Air Circulation Unloaded
ï.25qC ï.25qC
ï.25qC
Air Circulation
ï.50qC
ï.50qC
Heating
Heating

Falling Rising
Temperature Temperature

4.3.4 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation

a. If the supply air temperature falls to 0.5°C (0.9°F) below setpoint, the system will enter Perishable Mode Heat-
ing (see Figure 4.5). The controller will close contacts TH to allow power to flow through the Heat Termination
Thermostat (HTT) to energize the Heater Contactor (HR). The orange HEAT light will be energized, and the
evaporator fans will continue to operate in order to circulate heated air throughout the container.
b. When the supply temperature rises to 0.25°C (0.45°F) below setpoint, contacts TH open to de-energize the
heaters. The orange HEAT light will be de-energized, and the evaporator fans continue to operate in order
to circulate air throughout the container.
c. If supply rises to 54°C (130°F), the Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT) will open and de-energize HR. HTT is
mounted to the evaporator center tube sheet.

4.3.5 Perishable Mode Dehumidification

Perishable Mode Dehumidification is activated to reduce humidity levels inside the container. The dehumidification
setpoint is entered using function code Cd33, Humidity Setpoint. When dehumidification is active, the controller will
energize the Heater Contactor (HR), and the yellow SUPPLY light will flash ON and OFF every second. In order for
dehumidification to be activated, the following conditions must be satisfied:
• The Humidity Sensor (HS) reading is above the Humidity Setpoint, Cd33.
• The unit is in Perishable Steady State mode and supply air temperature is less than 0.25°C (0.45°F) above
setpoint.
• The Heater Debounce Timer has timed out (five minutes).
• The High Pressure Switch (HPS) is not open.
• The Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT) is closed.

T-370 4–6
If the above conditions are true, the evaporator fans will switch from high speed to low speed; evaporator fan
speed will switch every hour thereafter as long as all conditions are maintained. If any condition except item (1)
becomes false OR if the relative humidity sensed is 2% below the humidity setpoint, the high speed evaporator
fans will be energized.
During dehumidification, power is applied to the heaters; this added heat causes the controller to force the evapo-
rator temperature down in order to compensate for the increased load. The low coil temperature chills the return air
(below dew point), causing excess moisture to condensate on the coil. The water that is collected from the coil is
drained out of the system through the drain pan. The air is then reheated to setpoint, and the dehumidified supply
air is sent back to the container.
When the relative humidity sensed is 2% below the humidity setpoint, the controller will de-energize the heat relay,
however the controller will continue to cycle heating, when required, to maintain relative humidity below the
selected setpoint. If the dehumidification is terminated by a condition other than the sensed humidity level, e.g., an
out-of-range or compressor shutdown condition, the Heater Contactor (HR) is de-energized immediately.
To prevent rapid cycling and consequent Heater Contactor (HR) wear, two timers are activated during dehumidifi-
cation mode:
1. Heater Debounce Timer (five minutes) - The Heater Debounce Timer is started whenever the Heater Con-
tactor (HR) status is changed. The HR remains energized (or de-energized) for at least five minutes even if
the setpoint criteria are satisfied.
2. Out-of-Range Timer (five minutes) - The out-of-range timer is started to maintain heater operation for dehu-
midification during a temporary temperature out-of-range condition. If the supply air temperature remains
out of range for more than five minutes, the heaters will be de-energized to allow the system to recover. The
out-of-range timer starts as soon as the temperature exceeds the in-range tolerance value set by function
code Cd30.

4.3.6 Perishable Dehumidification - Bulb Mode

Bulb mode is an extension of dehumidification which allows changes to the evaporator fan speed and/or defrost
termination setpoints.
Bulb mode is active when Cd35 is set to “Bulb.” Once bulb mode is activated, the user may then change dehumid-
ification evaporator fan operation from the default to constant low or constant high speed. This is done by toggling
Cd36 from its default of “alt” to “Lo” or “Hi” as desired. If low speed evaporator fan operation is selected, this gives
the user the additional capability of selecting dehumidification setpoints from 60 to 95%.
In addition, if bulb mode is active, Cd37 may be set to override the previous defrost termination thermostat (DTT)
settings. The temperature at which the DTT will be considered “open” may be changed [in 0.1°C (0.2°F) incre-
ments] to any value between 25.6°C (78°F) and 4°C (39.2°F). The temperature at which the DTT is considered
closed for interval timer start or demand defrost is 10°C for “open” values from 25.6°C (78°F) down to a 10°C set-
ting. For “open” values lower than 10°C, the “closed” values will decrease to the same value as the “open” setting.
Bulb mode is terminated when:
1. Bulb mode code Cd35 is set to “Nor.”
2. Dehumidification code Cd33 is set to “Off.”
3. The user changes the setpoint to one that is in the frozen range.
When bulb mode is disabled by any of the above conditions, evaporator fan operation for dehumidification reverts
to “alt” and the DTS termination setting resets to the value determined by CnF41.

4.3.7 Frozen Mode Temperature Control

When configuration variable CnF26 (Heat Lockout Change Option) is set to -10C, Frozen Mode is active with set-
points at or below -10°C (+14°F). When CnF26 is set to -5°C, Frozen Mode is active at or below -5°C (+23°F).
In Frozen Mode, the yellow RETURN indicator light is energized, the default reading on the display window reflects
the Return Temperature Sensor (RTS) reading, and the controller maintains return air temperature to setpoint.
When return air temperature reaches the In-Range Tolerance (Cd30) the green IN RANGE light will energize.
When operating in Frozen Mode additional controls are applied to the Evaporator Fans and VFD Speed. If tem-
perature is above the setpoint plus the control band, the VFD will operate at maximum allowable speed. As the
control temperature approaches setpoint, the compressor speed will be reduced to maintain temperature to within -
0.2°C (0.36°F) of setpoint. If the temperature should continue to fall, the system will turn off the refrigeration circuit
and operate with evaporator fans at low speed only.

4–7 T-370
 Figure 4.6 Controller Operation - Frozen Mode

Frozen Mode
Controller Set Point at or BELOW ï10qC (+14qF),
or ï5qC (+23qF) optionally
+2.5qC
(+4.5qF)

Cooling,
Economized

+.25qC
Set Point
ï.25qC

Air Circulation

Falling Rising

4.3.8 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation

Unit will be in Frozen Mode whenever setpoint is at or lower than -10°C (+14°F) or -5°C (+23°F) depending upon
the CnF26 (Heat Lockout Change Option) setting.
a. When the return air temperature is above setpoint and decreasing, the unit will energize the compressor
contactor (CH), the gas cooler fan motor (GM), the gas cooler high speed contactor (GF), the evaporator fan
motors (EM), the evaporator low speed contactor (ES), and the Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV). The
white COOL light is also energized.
b. When return air temperature decreases to a predetermined tolerance above setpoint, the green IN RANGE
light is energized.
c. When the return air temperature decreases to a predetermined point below setpoint, the controller will set
the VFD to 0%, and de-energize the gas cooler fan motor (GM), the gas cooler high speed contactor (GF),
and Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV). The white COOL light is also de-energized.
d. The evaporator fan motors continue to run in low speed to circulate air throughout the container. The green
IN RANGE light remains energized as long as the return air is within tolerance of setpoint.
e. If return air temperature drops to 10°C (18°F) or more below setpoint, the evaporator high speed contactor
(EF) energizes to increase fans to high speed to initiate Frozen Mode “heating”.
f. When the return air temperature increases to 0.25°C (0.45°F) above setpoint and three minutes have
elapsed, the controller will return to the frozen cooling mode.

T-370 4–8
4.3.9 Defrost
Defrost is initiated to remove ice buildup from the evaporator coil which can obstruct air flow and reduce the cooling
capacity of the unit. The defrost cycle may consist of up to three distinct operations depending upon the reason for
the defrost or model number configuration. The first is de-icing of the coil, the second is defrost due to a probe
check cycle and the third is a snap freeze process based on the unit model configuration.
• De-icing the coil consists of removing power to the cooling components (compressor, evaporator fans, and con-
denser fan), closing the EEV, and turning on the heaters, which are located below the evaporator coil. During
normal operation, de-icing will continue until temperatures indicate that the ice on the coil has been removed,
proper air flow has been restored, and the unit is ready to control temperature efficiently.
• If defrost was initiated by the probe check logic, then the Probe Check is carried out after the completion of the
defrost cycle. A Probe Check is initiated only when there is an inaccuracy between the controller temperature
sensors.
• Snap Freeze allows the system to cool for a period of time after de-icing, with the evaporator fans turned off and
is only carried out if configured by model number. Snap-Freeze allows for the removal of latent de-icing heat
from the evaporator coils, and freezes any remaining moisture that might otherwise be blown into the container.
For more information on Probe Check, see Section 5.8.

4.3.10 Defrost Operation

Initiation of defrost is dependent on the state of the Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS). When the DTS senses a
temperature less than 10°C (50°F), the defrost options become active and the timer is engaged for the initiation of
the defrost cycle. The defrost time accumulates when the compressor is running. In the perishable mode, this is the
same as real time as the compressor in general runs continuously. In frozen mode, the actual time necessary to
count down to the next defrost will exceed the defrost interval depending on the compressor duty-cycle.
When the defrost mode is in the active state, defrost can be initiated when any one of the following additional con-
ditions become true:
1. Manually: Press and hold the MANUAL DEFROST / INTERVAL key for 5 seconds.
2. Timer: The Defrost Interval Timer reaches the user selectable Interval. The user-selected intervals are 3, 6,
9, 12, 24 Hours, Off, AUTO, or Pulse; factory default is AUTO. Refer to Defrost Interval setting on the Trip
Settings screen.
a. Automatic defrost starts with an initial defrost at three hours and then adjusts the interval to the next
defrost based on the accumulation of ice on the evaporator coil. Following a start-up or after termination
of defrost, the time will not begin counting down until the DTS reading falls below 10°C (50°F). If the
reading of DTS rises above termination setting any time during the timer count down, the interval is reset
and the countdown starts over. The Auto defrost time is reset to three hours start time after every PTI ini-
tiation or trip start interval.
b. Fan Pulsing Logic is used to help prevent ice formation in the drain gutter and drain cup and ice buildup
in supply air channel by using the evaporator fans to blow the warm air onto these areas during unit
defrost. When cooling at lower setpoints, evaporator fan pulsing can be used during Defrost / De-ice
when the “Pulse” option is selected for the Defrost Interval setting on the Trip Settings screen. When
enabled, evaporator fan pulsing will occur based on the unit temperature setpoint and the Evap Fan
Pulsing Temp setting on the Trip Settings screen. QUEST II also pulses the evaporator fans during
Defrost/De-ice within a narrow perishable setpoint range. The logic for each evaporator fan pulsing fea-
ture is described below.
c. After a new Defrost Interval is selected, the previously selected Interval is used until the next defrost ter-
mination, the next time the DTS contacts are OPEN, or the next time power to the control is interrupted.
If the previous value or the new value is “OFF”, the newly selected value will be used immediately.
3. Probe Check: If defrost is initiated due to Probe Check immediately following the defrost cycle the evapora-
tion fans are started and run for eight minutes to stabilize the temperature throughout the container. A probe
check comparison is carried out at the end of the eight minute period if any sensor is found out of calibration.
At this time its alarm set is no longer used for control/reorder purposes.
4. Delta T Logic: If the difference between return and supply air temperature (Delta T) becomes too great indi-
cating possible reduced airflow over the evaporator coil caused by ice buildup requiring a defrost.

4–9 T-370
 a. In Perishable Pull Down - Delta T increases to greater than 12°C, and 90 minutes of compressor run
time have been recorded.
b. In Perishable Steady State - A baseline Delta T is recorded following the first defrost cycle after steady
state conditions are reached, (the unit is cooling, and the evaporator fans and heaters must remain in a
stable state for a period of five minutes). Defrost will be initiated if Delta T increases to greater than 4°C
above the baseline, and 90 minutes of compressor run time have been recorded.
c. In Frozen Mode - Defrost will be initiated if Delta T increases to greater than 16°C and 90 minutes of
compressor run time have been recorded.
When defrost is initiated, the controller closes the EEV, opens contacts TC, TN and TE (or TV) to de-energize the
compressor, condenser fan and evaporator fans.
The controller then closes contacts TH to supply power to the heaters. The orange DEFROST light and heat light
are illuminated and the COOL light is also de-energized.
The EEV and DUV are independently operated by the microprocessor. Complete schematics and legends are
located in Section 9.
Defrost will terminate when the DTS reading rises above one of two model number configurable options selection,
either an upper setting of 25.6°C (78°F) which is default or lower setting of 18°C (64°F). When the DTS reading
rises to the configured setting, the de-icing operation is terminated.

4.3.11 Defrost Related Settings

DTS Failure
When the return air temperature falls to 7°C (45°F), the controller ensures that the defrost temperature sensor
(DTS) reading has dropped to 10°C or below. If it has not, it indicates a failed DTS. A DTS failure alarm is triggered
and the defrost mode is operated by the Return Temperature Sensor (RTS). Defrost will terminate after 1 hour.
If the DTS fails to reach is termination setting, the defrost terminate after 2 hours of operation.

Defrost Timer
If CnF23 is configured to “SAv” (save), then the value of the defrost interval timer will be saved at power down and
restored at power up. This option prevents short power interruptions from resetting an almost expired defrost inter-
val, and possibly delaying a needed defrost cycle. If the save option is not selected the defrost timer will re-initiate
and begin recounting.
If CnF11 is model number configured to OFF the operator will be allowed to choose “OFF” as a defrost interval
option.
If CnF64 is configured in the operator will be allowed to choose “PuLS” as a defrost interval option. For units oper-
ating with “PuLS” selected, defrost interval is determined by the unit temperature setpoint and the Evap Fan Puls-
ing Temp setting on the Trip Settings screen. When the unit temperature setpoint is equal to or less than the
Evaporator Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting, the defrost interval is set to 6 hours. Otherwise, the defrost interval is
determined using the Automatic Defrost Interval Determination logic. In either case, “PuLS” remains displayed in
this function select code.
If any Auto Pretrip sequence is initiated, the Defrost Interval setting will be set to “AUTO” unless CnF49 (OEM
Reset) is set to “Custom” AND CnF64 (Evaporator Fan Pulsing Logic) configuration variable is set to IN, in which
case the Defrost Interval setting on the Trip Settings screen will be set to “Pulse”.
If defrost does not terminate correctly and temperature reaches the setpoint of the Heat Termination Thermostat
(HTT) 54°C (130°F), the HTT will open to de-energize the heaters (AL059 & AL060). If the HTT does not open and
termination does not occur within two hours, the controller will terminate defrost. AL060 will be activated to inform
of a possible DTS failure.

4.4 Protection Modes Of Operation

4.4.1 Evaporator Fan Operation
Opening of an evaporator fan internal protector will shut down the unit.

4.4.2 Failure Action, Cd29

Function code Cd29 may be operator set to select action the controller will take upon system failure. The factory
default is full system shutdown. See Table 4–7.

T-370 4–10
4.4.3 Generator Protection
Function codes Cd31(Stagger Start, Offset Time) and Cd32 (Current Limit) may be operator set to control the start
up sequence of multiple units and operating current draw. The factory default allows on demand starting (no delay)
of units and normal current draw. See Table 4–7.

4.4.4 Compressor High Temperature, Low Pressure Protection

The controller monitors the temperatures and pressures within the system. If pressure or temperatures rise above
or below the allowed limit, the compressor will be cycled off and all system valves will be moved to preset positions.
The gas cooler fan will continue to run for 30 seconds. After 3 minutes the temperature and pressures will be
checked, if they have returned to allowable values the unit will restart according to normal control algorithm. The
controller will continue to monitor these limits. If they continue to trip, the controller will adjust the off time in order to
allow for unit stabilization.

4.4.5 Compressor Internal Protector (IP)

The reciprocating compressor internal protector (IP) is a thermal switch that is integrated into the 24 volt circuit.
When the internal temperature of the compressor gets too high, the thermal switch (IP), which is embedded in the
compressor motor windings, opens. This causes a break in the 24 volt circuit which de-energizes the compressor
contactor (CH) and removes power to the compressor. When the microprocessor senses the open circuit AL24 is
triggered on.
Once the compressor internal temperature falls below the setpoint, the thermal switch (IP) closes and restores the 24
volt circuit. This closes the compressor contactor (CH), restores power to the compressor, and AL24 is triggered off.

4.5 Controller Alarms

Alarm display is an independent controller software function. If an operating parameter is outside of expected
range or a component does not return the correct signals back to the controller, an alarm is generated. A listing of
the alarms is provided in Table 4–8.
The alarm philosophy balances the protection of the refrigeration unit and that of the refrigerated cargo. The action
taken when an error is detected always considers the survival of the cargo. Rechecks are made to confirm that an
error actually exists.
Some alarms requiring compressor shutdown have time delays before and after to try to keep the compressor on
line. An example is alarm code “LO,” (low main voltage), when a voltage drop of over 25% occurs, an indication is
given on the display, but the unit will continue to run.
When an Alarm Occurs:
• The red ALARM light will energize for critical alarm code numbers 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, and 27.
• If a detectable problem exists, its alarm code will be alternately displayed with the setpoint on the left display.
• The user should scroll through the alarm list to determine what alarms exist or have existed. Alarms must be
diagnosed and corrected before the alarm list can be cleared.

4.5.1 Displaying Alarm Codes

1. While in the Default Display mode, press the ALARM LIST key. This accesses the Alarm List Display Mode,
which displays any alarms archived in the alarm queue.
2. The alarm queue stores up to 16 alarms in the sequence in which they occurred. The user may scroll
through the list by pressing an Arrow key.
3. The left display will show “AL##,” where ## is the alarm number sequentially in the queue.
4. The right display will show the actual alarm code. “AA##” will display for an active alarm, where “##” is the
alarm code. Or “IA##” will display for an inactive alarm, see Table 4–8.
5. “END” is displayed to indicate the end of the alarm list if any alarms are active.
6. “CLEAr” is displayed if all alarms are inactive. The alarm queue may then be cleared by pressing the
ENTER key. The alarm list will clear and “-----” will be displayed.

NOTICE
AL26 is active when all of the sensors are not responding. Check the connector at the back of
the controller; if it is loose or unplugged, reconnect it, then run a Pre-trip test P5 to clear AL26.

4–11 T-370
4.6 Pre-Trip Diagnostics
Pre-trip Diagnostics is an independent mode that suspends normal Control Mode activities to verify system functional-
ity by running a series of individual tests. The tests can be run in Auto Mode, which automatically performs a pre pro-
grammed sequence of tests, or Manual Mode, which allows the operator to select and run any of the tests individually.
A description of each individual Pre-trip test can be found in Section 4.12. Detailed operating instructions are pro-
vided in Section 5.7.

! CAUTION
Pre-trip diagnostics should not be performed with critical temperature cargoes in the container.

! CAUTION
When PRE-TRIP key is pressed, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode will be deactivated. At
the completion of Pre-trip activity, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated.

Pre-trip testing is initiated by pressing the PRE-TRIP key. This causes “SeLCt PrtrP” to be displayed for five seconds
or until an Arrow key is pressed. Pressing an Arrow key opens the test selection menu. Scroll through the menu with
the Arrow keys and then press the ENTER key to start the indicated test sequence or individual test.
Selecting “P rSLts” and pressing the ENTER key displays the results of all Pre-trip sub-tests. The results are dis-
played as “PASS” or “FAIL” for all tests run to completion since power on, and displayed as “-----” for tests not run.
During selection mode, failure to press either an Arrow key or ENTER key for 5 seconds will return the system to its
default display, and normal operating mode.
There are two Auto Mode test sequences:
• Short Pre-trip Sequence tests most functions, sensors, and system components. The Short Sequence
does not test the high pressure switch, heater performance, or cooling performance, due to their duration.
• Long Pre-trip Sequence includes all of the Short Sequence Tests, as well as tests for the high pressure
switch, heater performance, and cooling performance. The Long Sequence is only available if enabled by
configuration. Units configured for the Long Sequence can run either the Short Sequence or the Long
Sequence.
Manual Mode allows individual Pre-trip tests to be run one at a time, giving operators the ability to test individual
system components.
Pre-trip diagnostics may also be initiated via communication; however individual Manual Mode tests can only be
initiated at the keypad.
While a Pre-trip test is running, PX-X will be displayed on the left, where the X’s indicate the test number and sub-
test. The right display will show a countdown timer in minutes and seconds. During the Long Sequence, various
relevant temperature and pressure information will replace the countdown timer on the right display.

4.6.1 Auto Test Operation from Keypad

When a Pre-trip auto test is initiated, the system executes a series of individual tests without any need for operator
interface (except P0-0 where the proper functioning of the display must be observed). Each individual Pre-trip test
varies in length, depending on the component being tested.
When the auto or auto1 testing is allowed to run to completion, without operator interruption, the system will exit
Pre-trip mode and return to normal control operation. When the auto2 or auto3 test series is selected, and runs
uninterrupted to successful completion, the unit will turn off all machinery, display either “AUtO2” “end” or “AUtO3”
“end”, and wait for an ENTER key press before returning to normal control operation.
If an individual test fails, the test will be repeated once automatically from the beginning of the current Pre-trip test
(not sub-test). An exception to this is with Long Sequence sub-tests P8-0 and P10-0. If either one of these sub-
tests fails they will not be automatically repeated; failure of sub-tests P8-1, P8-2, P10-1 and P10-2 will cause auto-
matic repeat. Repeated failure of a test will cause “FAIL” to be shown on the right display, with the corresponding
test number to the left, and the SUPPLY and RETURN LED’s will be flashed alternately. Pressing the Down Arrow
key will repeat the test, pressing the Up Arrow key will skip to the next test. The system will wait indefinitely for
operator input. Holding the PRE-TRIP key will terminate Pre-trip mode operation. This is true for both auto2 and
auto3 tests (auto3 does not include P10).

T-370 4–12
4.6.2 Manual Test Operation
Individually selected Pre-trip tests, other than the LED / Display test (P0-0), allow the operator to verify the func-
tionality of an individual component. At the conclusion of the selected test, “PASS” or “FAIL” will be displayed. Upon
failure, the SUPPLY and RETURN LED’s will flash on alternately. This message will remain displayed for up to
three minutes, in which time the operator may select another test. If three minutes expires, the system will termi-
nate Pre-trip and return to control mode operation. Following any individually selected Pre-trip test, all outputs will
be de-energized.

4.6.3 Auto Test Operation from Serial Communications

Pre-trip may also be initiated via communications. The operation is the same as for the Auto Test mode except that
if a test fails, Pre-trip mode will automatically terminate. When initiated via communications, a test may not be inter-
rupted with an Arrow key, but Pre-trip mode can be terminated with the PRE-TRIP key.

4.6.4 Terminating Pre-trip

A Pre-trip test can be terminated by pressing and holding the PRE-TRIP key for 1 to 2 seconds. The system will
then resume normal operation. Any Pre-trip test may be interrupted by pressing the Up Arrow key. This will return
the operator to the test selection mode described above, and all machinery outputs will be de-energized. Pre-trip
may also be terminated via communications.

4.6.5 Results Reporting

The system may be configured to send Pre-trip test results along with embedded test data points to the Data-
CORDER at the end of Pre-trip test. If not configured for data points, only results will be reported to the Data-
CORDER.
At the end of a Pre-trip test, the message “P rSLts” (Pre-trip results) will be displayed. Pressing the ENTER key will
allow the user to see the results for all sub-tests. The results will be displayed as “PASS” or “FAIL” for all the Pre-
trip tests run to completion.

4.7 DataCORDER
4.7.1 Description
Carrier Transicold “DataCORDER” software is integrated into the controller and serves to eliminate the tempera-
ture recorder and paper chart. DataCORDER functions may be accessed by keypad selections and viewed on the
display module. The unit is also fitted with interrogation connections (see Figure 4.1) which may be used with the
Carrier Transicold Data Reader to download data. A computer with Carrier Transicold DataLINE software may also
be used to download data and configure settings. The DataCORDER consists of:
Configuration Software
Operational Software
Data Storage Memory
Real Time Clock (with internal battery backup)
Six Thermistor Inputs
Interrogation Connections
Power Supply (battery pack)

The DataCORDER performs the following functions:

a. Logs data at 15, 30, 60 or 120 minute intervals and stores two years of data (based on one hour interval).
b. Records and displays alarms on the display module.
c. Records results of Pre-trip testing.
d. Records DataCORDER and temperature control software generated data and events as follows:
Container ID Change
Software Upgrades
Alarm Activity
Battery Low (battery pack)
Data Retrieval
Defrost Start and End
4–13 T-370
 Dehumidification Start and End
Power Loss (with and without battery pack)
Power Up (with and without battery pack)
Remote Probe Temperatures in the Container (USDA
Cold treatment and Cargo probe recording)
Return Air Temperature
Set Point Change
Supply Air Temperature
Real Time Clock Battery (internal) Replacement
Real Time Clock Modification
Trip Start
ISO Trip Header (When entered via
Interrogation program)
Economy Mode Start and End
“Auto 1/Auto 2/Auto 3” Pre-trip Start and End
Bulb Mode Start
Bulb Mode Changes
Bulb Mode End
USDA Trip Comment
Humidification Start and End
USDA Probe Calibration
Fresh Air Vent Position

4.7.2 DataCORDER Software

DataCORDER Software is subdivided into Operational Software, Configurations, and the Data Memory.

Operational Software
The Operational Software reads and records inputs from the operational components. How the component infor-
mation is recorded and stored is determined the DataCORDER configurations. The values of these components
can be viewed through the DataCORDER function codes. To access the function codes, do the following:

1. Press the ALT. MODE and CODE SELECT

keys.

2. Press an Arrow key until the left window displays the desired code number. The right window will display the
value of this item for five seconds before returning to the normal display mode.
3. If a longer display time is desired, press the ENTER key to extend the display time to five minutes.

Configurations
The recording and alarm functions of the DataCORDER based on the configurations. Reprogramming to the factory
installed configuration is achieved via a configuration card. Changes to the unit DataCORDER configuration may be
made using the DataLINE interrogation software. A listing of the configuration variables is provided in Table 4–3.
Descriptions of DataCORDER operation for each variable setting are provided in the following paragraphs.

4.7.3 Sensor Configuration (dCF02)

Two modes of operation may be configured, the Standard Mode and the Generic Mode.

Standard Mode
In Standard Mode, the user may configure the DataCORDER to record data using one of seven standard configu-
rations. The seven standard configuration variables, with their descriptions, are listed in Table 4–3. The inputs of
the six thermistors (supply, return, USDA #1, #2, #3 and cargo probe) and the Humidity Sensor (HS) input will be
generated by the DataCORDER.

T-370 4–14
 NOTICE
The DataCORDER software uses the Supply and Return Recorder Sensors (SRS, RRS). The
temperature control software uses the Supply and Return Temperature Sensors (STS, RTS).

Generic Mode
Generic Mode allows user selection of the network data points to be recorded. The user may select up to a total of
eight data points for recording. A list of data points available for recording follows. Changing the configuration to
generic and selecting which data points to record may be done using the Carrier Transicold Data Retrieval Program.
1. Control mode
2. Control temperature
3. Frequency
4. Humidity
5. Phase A current
6. Phase B current
7. Phase C current
8. Main voltage
9. Evaporator Expansion Valve percentage
10. Discrete outputs (Bit mapped - require special handling if used)
11. Discrete inputs (Bit mapped - require special handling if used)
12. Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS)
13. Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS)
14. Compressor Discharge Sensor (CPDS)
15. Return Temperature Sensor (RTS)
16. Supply Temperature Sensor (STS)
17. Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS)
18. Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)
19. Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
20. Flash Tank Pressure Transducer (FPT)
21. Vent Position Sensor (VPS)

4.7.4 Logging Interval (dCF03)

The user may select four different time intervals between data recordings. Data is logged at exact intervals in
accordance with the real time clock. The clock is factory set at Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

4.7.5 Thermistor Format (dCF04)

The user may configure the format in which thermistor readings are recorded. The short resolution is a 1 byte for-
mat and the long resolution is a 2 byte format. The short requires less memory and records temperature with vari-
able resolutions depending on temperature range. The long records temperature in 0.01°C (0.02°F) steps for the
entire range.

4.7.6 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06)

Three types of data sampling are available: average, snapshot and USDA. When configured to average, the aver-
age of readings taken every minute over the recording period is recorded. When configured to snapshot, the sen-
sor reading at the log interval time is recorded. When USDA is configured, the supply and return temperature
readings are averaged and the three USDA probe readings are snapshot.

4–15 T-370
4.7.7 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 - dCF10)
The USDA and cargo probe alarms may be configured to OFF, ON or AUTO.
If a probe alarm is configured to OFF, the alarm for this probe is always disabled.
If a probe alarm is configured to ON, the associated alarm is always enabled.
If the probes are configured to AUTO, they act as a group. This function is designed to assist users who keep their
DataCORDER configured for USDA recording, but do not install the probes for every trip. If all the probes are dis-
connected, no alarms are activated. As soon as one of the probes is installed, all of the alarms are enabled and the
remaining probes that are not installed will give active alarm indications.

Table 4–3 DataCORDER Configuration Variables

Config Title Default Option
dCF01 (Future Use) −− −−
dCF02 Sensor Configuration 2 2, 5, 6, 9, 54, 64, 94
dCF03 Logging Interval (Minutes) 60 15, 30, 60, 120
dCF04 Thermistor Format Short Long
dCF05 Thermistor Sampling Type A A, b, C
dCF06 Controlled Atmosphere / Humidity Sampling A A, b
dCF07 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 1 A Auto, On, Off
dCF08 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 2 A Auto, On, Off
dCF09 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 3 A Auto, On, Off
dCF10 Alarm Configuration Cargo Sensor A Auto, On, Off

Table 4–4 DataCORDER Standard Variables

Standard Config Description
2 sensors (dCF02=2) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
5 sensors (dCF02=5) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
3 USDA thermistor inputs
6 sensors (dCF02=6) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 humidity input
9 sensors (dCF02=9) Not Applicable
6 sensors (dCF02=54) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 cargo probe (thermistor input)
7 sensors (dCF02=64) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 humidity input
1 cargo probe (thermistor input)
10 sensors (dCF02=94) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 humidity input
1 cargo probe (thermistor input)
3 C.A. inputs (NOT APPLICABLE)

T-370 4–16
4.7.8 DataCORDER Power Up
The DataCORDER may be powered up in any one of four ways:
a. Normal AC power: The DataCORDER is powered up when the unit is turned on via the stop-start switch.
b. Controller DC battery pack power: If a battery pack is installed, the DataCORDER will power up for commu-
nication when an interrogation cable is plugged into an interrogation receptacle.
c. External DC battery pack power: A 12 volt battery pack may also be plugged into the back of the interroga-
tion cable, which is then plugged into an interrogation port. No controller battery pack is required with this
method.
d. Real Time Clock demand: If the DataCORDER is equipped with a charged battery pack and AC power is not
present, the DataCORDER will power up when the real time clock indicates that a data recording should
take place. When the DataCORDER is finished recording, it will power down.
During DataCORDER power-up, while using battery-pack power, the controller will perform a hardware voltage
check on the battery. If the hardware check passes, the controller will energize and perform a software battery volt-
age check before DataCORDER logging. If either test fails, the real time clock battery power-up will be disabled
until the next AC power cycle. Further DataCORDER temperature logging will be prohibited until that time.
An alarm will be generated when the battery voltage transitions from good to bad indicating that the battery pack
needs recharging. If the alarm condition persists for more than 24 hours on continuous AC power, the battery pack
needs replacement.

4.7.9 Pre-Trip Data Recording

The DataCORDER will record the initiation of a Pre-trip test (see Section 4.6) and the results of each of the tests
included in Pre-trip. The data is time-stamped and may be extracted via the Data Retrieval program. See Table 4–
10 for a description of the data stored in the DataCORDER for each corresponding Pre-trip test.

4.7.10 DataCORDER Communications

Data retrieval from the DataCORDER can be accomplished by using one of the following: DataLINE or a communi-
cations interface module.
A DataLINE or a communications interface module display of Communication Failed is caused by faulty data trans-
fer between the DataCORDER and the data retrieval device. Common causes include:
• Bad cable or connection between DataCORDER and data retrieval device.
• PC communication port(s) unavailable or mis-assigned.
• Chart Recorder Fuse (FCR) blown.
Configuration identification for the models covered herein may be obtained on the Container Products Group Infor-
mation Center by authorized Carrier Transicold Service Centers.

DataBANK Card
The DataBANK™ card is a PCMCIA card that interfaces with the controller through the programming slot and can
download the data at a much faster rate compared to the PC or DataReader. Files downloaded to DataBANK card
files are accessible through an Omni PC Card Drive. The files can then be viewed using the DataLINE software.

DataLINE Software
DataLINE software for a personal computer is supplied on both floppy disks and CD. This software allows interroga-
tion, configuration variable assignment, screen view of the data, hard copy report generation, cold treatment probe cal-
ibration and file management. Refer to Data Retrieval manual 62-10629 for a more detailed explanation of the
DataLINE interrogation software. The DataLINE manual may be found on the internet at www.container.carrier.com.

Communications Interface Module

The communications interface module is a slave module, which allows communication with a master central moni-
toring station. The module will respond to communication and return information over the main power line. With a
communications interface module installed, all functions and selectable features that are accessible at the unit may
be performed at the master station. Retrieval of all DataCORDER reports may also be performed. Refer to the
master system technical manual for further information.

4–17 T-370
4.7.11 DataCORDER Alarms
The alarm display is an independent DataCORDER function. If an operating parameter is outside of the expected
range or a component does not return the correct values to the DataCORDER, an alarm is generated. The Data-
CORDER contains a buffer of up to eight alarms. A listing of the DataCORDER alarms is provided in Table 4–5.
See Section 4.7.7 for configuration information.

To Display Alarm Codes:

1. While in the Default Display mode, press the ALT. MODE & ALARM LIST keys. This accesses the Data-
CORDER Alarm List Display Mode, which displays any alarms stored in the alarm queue.
2. To scroll through the alarm list, use the Arrow keys.
3. The left display will show “AL#” where # is the alarms number in the queue. The right display will show
“AA##,” if the alarm is active, where ## is the alarm number. “IA##,” will show if the alarm is inactive
4. “END” is displayed to indicate the end of the alarm list if any alarms are active. “CLEAr” is displayed if all the
alarms in the list are inactive.
5. If no alarms are active, the alarm queue may be cleared. The exception to this rule is the DataCORDER
Alarm List Full alarm (dAL91), which does not have to be inactive in order to clear the alarm list.

To Clear the Alarm List:

1. Press the ALT. MODE and ALARM LIST keys.
2. Press an Arrow key until “CLEAr” is displayed.
3. Press the ENTER key. The alarm list will clear and “-----” will be displayed.
4. Press the ALARM LIST key. “AL” will show on the left display and “-----” on the right display when there are
no alarms in the list.
5. Upon clearing of the alarm queue, the alarm light will be turned off.

Table 4–5 DataCORDER Alarm Indications

Code Title Description
dAL70 Sensor 1, Recorder Supply The supply recorder sensor reading is outside of the range of -50°C to
Temperature Out of Range 70°C (-58°F to +158°F), or the probe check logic has determined there
is a fault with this sensor.
NOTE:
The P5 Pre-trip test must be run to inactivate the alarm.
dAL71 Recorder Return The return recorder sensor reading is outside of the range of -50°C to
Temperature Out of Range 70°C (-58°F to +158°F), or the probe check logic has determined there
is a fault with this sensor.
NOTE:
The P5 Pre-trip test must be run to inactivate the alarm.
dAL72-74 USDA1, USDA2, & USDA3 The USDA probe temperature reading is outside of -50°C to 70°C (-58°F
Temperature Sensor (3, 4, to +158°F) range.
& 5) Out of Range
dAL75 Cargo Probe, Sensor The cargo probe temperature reading is outside of -50°C to 70°C (-58°F
6 Out of Range to +158°F) range.
dAL76, 77 Future Expansion These alarms are for future expansion and are not in use at this time.
dAL78-85 Network Data Point 1 - 8 The network data point is outside of its specified range. The
Out of Range DataCORDER is configured by default to record the supply and return
recorder sensors. The DataCORDER may be configured to record up to
eight additional network data points. An alarm number (AL78 to AL85) is
assigned to each configured point. When an alarm occurs, the
DataCORDER must be interrogated to identify the data point assigned.
When a Humidity Sensor (HS) is installed, it is usually assigned to AL78.

T-370 4–18
 Table 4–5 DataCORDER Alarm Indications
Code Title Description
dAL86 RTC Battery Low The real time clock (RTC) backup battery is too low to adequately
maintain the RTC reading.
A real time clock failure is critical to the operation of the unit. If this alarm
occurs, replace the RTC battery at the next available opportunity. After
replacing the battery the following actions are required:
Update the RTC setting
• Update the unit’s software configuration
• Update the operational software
• Update all user selectable function code settings (defrost, set-
point, etc)
dAL87 RTC Failure An invalid time has been detected. Either the DataCORDER run time
hour and minute have not changed at the start of the hour, or the real
time clock (RTC) time has gained or lost more than 2 minutes in the
hour. This situation may be corrected by cycling the power, setting the
clock or meeting the above criteria for an hour.
dAL88 DataCORDER EEPROM A write of a critical DataCORDER item to Persistent Memory Block A
Failure location has failed after a retry.
dAL89 Flash Memory Error An error has been detected in the process of writing daily data to
the non-volatile FLASH memory.
dAL90 Future Expansion This alarm is for future expansion, and is not in use at this time.
dAL91 Alarm List Full The DataCORDER alarm queue is determined to be full (eight alarms).

4.7.12 ISO Trip Header

DataLINE provides the user with an interface to view / modify current settings of the ISO trip header through the
ISO Trip Header screen. The ISO Trip Header screen is displayed when the user clicks on the “ISO Trip Header”
button in the “Trip Functions” Group Box on the System Tools screen.
F9 function - Provides the user with a shortcut for manually triggering the refresh operation. Before sending modi-
fied parameter values, the user must ensure that a successful connection is established with the controller.
If the connection is established with the DataCORDER, the current contents of the ISO Trip Header from the Data-
CORDER will be displayed in each field. If the connection is not established with the DataCORDER, all fields on
the screen will be displayed as “Xs.” If at any time during the display of the ISO Trip Header screen the connection
is not established or is lost, the user is alerted to the status of the connection.
After modifying the values and ensuring a successful connection has been made with the DataCORDER, click on
the “Send” button to send the modified parameter values. The maximum allowed length of the ISO Trip Header is
128 characters. If the user tries to refresh the screen or close the utility without sending the changes made on the
screen to the DataCORDER, the user is alerted with a message.
4.7.13 USDA Cold Treatment
Sustained cold temperature has been employed as a post-harvest method for the control of fruit flies and other
insect genera. The commodity, insect species, treatment temperatures and exposure times are found in sections
T107, T108, and T109 of the USDA Treatment Manual. In response to the demand to replace fumigation with this
environmentally sound process, Carrier has integrated Cold Treatment capability into its microprocessor system.
These units have the ability to maintain supply air temperature within one quarter degree Celsius of setpoint and
record minute changes in product temperature within the DataCORDER memory, thus meeting USDA criteria.
Information on USDA is provided in the following sub-paragraphs.
USDA Recording
A special type of recording is used for USDA cold treatment purposes. Cold treatment recording requires three
remote temperature probes be placed at prescribed locations in the cargo. Provision is made to connect these
probes to the DataCORDER via receptacles located at the rear left-hand side of the unit. Four or five receptacles
are provided. The four 3-pin receptacles are for the probes. The 5-pin receptacle is the rear connection for the
Interrogator. The probe receptacles are sized to accept plugs with tricam coupling locking devices. A label on the
back panel of the unit shows which receptacle is used for each probe.

4–19 T-370
The standard DataCORDER report displays the supply and return air temperatures. The cold treatment report dis-
plays USDA #1, #2, #3 and the supply and return air temperatures. Cold treatment recording is backed up by a bat-
tery so recording can continue if AC power is lost.
USDA/ Message Trip Comment
A special feature in DataLINE allows the user to enter a USDA (or other) message in the header of a data report.
The maximum message length is 78 characters. Only one message will be recorded per day.
4.7.14 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure
If configured for USDA probes, the following is a summary of the steps required to initiate a USDA Cold Treat-
ment. Refer to the DataLINE User manual 62-10629 for more details.
1. Ensure the DataCORDER is configured as follows:
a. DataCORDER is configured for USDA probes, and logging interval set for 60 minutes.
b. Sensor is set to “2 Averaged 3-USDA.”
c. The resolution is set to “Normal.”
Figure 4.7 DataCorder Configuration Screen

2. Calibrate the three USDA probes by ice bathing the probes and performing the calibration function with the
DataLINE. This calibration procedure generates the probe offsets which are stored in the controller and
applied to the USDA sensors for use in generating sensor type reports. See Figure 4.8.
Figure 4.8 DataCorder Probe Calibration Screen

T-370 4–20
3. Pre-cool the container to the treatment temperature or below.
4. Install the DataCORDER module battery pack (if not already installed).
5. Place the three probes. Refer to USDA Treatment Manual for directions on placement of probes in fruit and
probe locations in container.
Sensor 1 Place the first sensor, labeled USDA1, in a box at the top of the stack of the fruit nearest
to the air return intake.
Sensor 2 Place the second sensor, labeled USDA2, slightly aft of the middle of the container,
halfway between the top and bottom of the stack.
Sensor 3 Place the third sensor, labeled USDA3, one pallet stack in from the doors of the
container, halfway between the top and bottom of the stack.

6. To initiate USDA recording, connect the personal computer and Enter ISO header information using the
DataLINE software. See Figure 4.9.
a. Enter ISO header information.
b. Enter a trip comment if desired.

Figure 4.9 DataCorder ISO Trip Header Screen

c. Using the System Tools screen in the DataLINE software perform a “trip start.” See Figure 4.10.

Figure 4.10 DataCorder Systems Tool Screen

4–21 T-370
4.8 Optional Features
4.8.1 Automatic Cold Treatment (ACT) Cd51
Cold Treatment has been employed as an effective post-harvest method for the control of Mediterranean and cer-
tain other tropical fruit flies. Exposing infested fruit to temperatures of 2.2°C (3.6°F) or below for specific time peri-
ods results in the mortality of various life stages for this group of insects.
Automated Cold Treatment (ACT) in the Carrier Transicold unit is a method to simplify the task of completing cold
treatment by automating the process of changing the setpoints. ACT is set up through function code Cd51. Refer to
Function Code table in this manual for Cd51 menu processing and displays.

NOTE
ACT, setup with Cd51, and Automatic Setpoint Change (ASC), setup with Cd53, will not work simulta-
neously. Setting one will deactivate the other.

Procedure to Set ACT:

1. Enter the required cargo setpoint. It must be lower than the treatment temperature discussed in step 5.
2. Press the CODE SELECT key.
3. Use the Arrow keys to scroll to Cd51, and then press the ENTER key.
4. "ACt" is now displayed in the left display and the right will display "Off". Use the Arrow keys to bring up "On"
in the right display and press the ENTER key.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

5. “trEAt" is now displayed in the left display and the right will be flashing the last setting (shown as XX.X°C).
Use the Arrow keys to select the desired cold treatment setpoint and press the ENTER key.

NOTE
"trEAt" is the maximum value that the USDA probes need to remain below, to pass the Cold Treatment
protocol. For instance, if the treat value is set at 35.0°F (1.7°C) then the USDA probe temperatures
must remain below 35.0°F (1.7°C) to pass.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

6. "dAyS" is now displayed in the left display and the right will be flashing. Use the Arrow keys to select the
desired days for cold treatment and press the ENTER key.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

7. "ProbE" is now displayed in the left display and the right will display the probe numbers that are connected.
Press the ENTER key. For instance, if "1234" is displayed, then all four of the probes are connected.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

T-370 4–22
 8. "SPnEW" is now displayed in the left display and the right will be flashing. Use the Arrow keys to select the
desired setpoint after the cold treatment process has successfully completed and press the ENTER key.
This would be the final temperature prior to the delivery of the cargo.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

9. Cd51 is now displayed in the left display and the right will display days / hours remaining in cold treatment.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

10. The unit will start to countdown once all detected USDA probes have reached the specified cold treatment
temperature. The cold treatment process will continue until the specified number of days is reached. During
operation, Cd51 will show the number of days and hours remaining in the cold treatment.

NOTE
Once the cold treatment process has been initiated, setpoint change via the keypad is disabled.

11. While the unit is operating in ACT mode, the left hand display will alternate between "COLd" and setpoint.
The right hand display will alternate between "trEAt" and the cargo temperature. Once the treatment time
has been completed, the setpoint temperature will increase to the "SPnEW" setting chosen in step 8.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

12. When the cold treatment process is complete, the "SPnEW" setpoint will be displayed in the left hand dis-
play and cargo temperature in the right hand display, alternating with "COLd" "Done". "COLd" "Done" will
continue to alternate with the setpoint and cargo temperature until ACT is turned off.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

Procedure to Turn ACT OFF:

ACT will be automatically turned off with a TripStart, or if a Pretrip is initiated.
1. To manually turn ACT Off, press the CODE SELECT key.
2. Use the Arrow keys to scroll to Cd51, and then press the ENTER key.
3. Use the Arrow keys to bring up "Off" in the right display and press the ENTER key.

4.8.2 Automatic Setpoint Change (ASC) Cd53

Automatic Setpoint Change (ASC) allows up to 6 setpoint changes to be pre-programmed over defined periods of
time using Cd53.
1. Press the CODE SELECT key.
2. Use the Arrow keys to scroll to Cd53, then press the ENTER key.
3. Use the Arrow keys to scroll to ON, then press the ENTER key. If ASC is already ON, selecting OFF will ter-
minate ASC.

4–23 T-370
 4. Select the desired number of setpoint changes (nSC) by scrolling through the available “flashing” options (1
– 6) in the right display, then press the ENTER key.
5. Select the initial setpoint: With (SP 0) in the left display, select by scrolling to the desired “flashing” setpoint
in the right display and press ENTER.
6. Select the days desired for initial setpoint (SP 0): With (DAY 0) in the left display, select by scrolling to the
desired “flashing” days (1 to 99) in the right display and press ENTER.
7. Select the next setpoint (SP 1): With (SP 1) in the left display, select by scrolling to the desired “flashing” set-
point in the right display and press ENTER.
8. Continue to select each additional setpoint.
9. Select a final setpoint (SP x): With (SP x) in the left display, select by scrolling to the desired “flashing” set-
point in the right display and press ENTER.
While the unit is operating in ASC mode, the left hand display will alternate between current unit setpoint and
“ASC”. The right hand display will alternate between current control temperature and “ACtvE”. The user can deter-
mine the amount of time left at the current setpoint by selecting Cd53. The amount of time left will be displayed in
the right display (XX (days) / XX (hours). By sequentially pressing ENTER, set parameters can be viewed.
At completion of ASC mode, the left hand display will alternate between current unit setpoint “ASC”. The right hand
display will alternate between current control temperature and “Done”.
The display will remain this way until ASC is turned off. The user can determine the date of completion by selecting
Cd53. With (done) in the left display, the date of completion will be displayed in the right display (Month / Day).
ASC can be manually turned off by selecting Cd53, scrolling to “Off” and pressing the ENTER key.
ACS will be automatically turned off after three days without power, or if a Pre-trip is initiated.
ACS (Cd53) will work independently of Automatic Cold Treatment (ACT) (Cd51). Setting one deactivates the other.

4.9 Controller Configuration Variables

NOTE
Configuration numbers not listed are not used in this application. These items may appear when loading
configuration software to the controller but changes will not be recognized by controller programming.

T-370 4–24
 Table 4–6 Controller Configuration Variables
Config Title
CnF02 Evaporator Fan Speed
CnF03 Control Sensors
CnF04 Dehumidification Mode
CnF08 Single Phase / 3-Phase Evaporator Fan Motor
CnF09 Refrigerant Selection
CnF11 Defrost “Off” Selection
CnF15 Discharge Temperature Sensor
CnF16 DataCORDER Present
CnF17 Discharge Pressure Sensor
CnF18 Heater
CnF20 Suction Pressure Sensor
CnF22 Economy Mode Option
CnF23 Defrost Interval Timer Save Option
CnF24 Advanced Pre-trip Enhanced Test Series Option
CnF25 Pre-trip Test Points / Results Recording Option
CnF26 Heat Lockout Change Option
CnF27 Suction Temperature Display Option
CnF28 Bulb Mode Option
CnF31 Probe Check Option
CnF32 Single Evaporator Fan Option
CnF33 Snap Freeze Option
CnF34 Degree Celsius Lockout Option
CnF37 Electronic Temperature Recorder
CnF41 Lower DTT Setting
CnF44 eAutoFresh Enabled
CnF45 Low Humidity Enabled
CnF47 Fresh Air Vent Position Sensor
CnF49 DataCORDER Configuration Restore
CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Selection
CnF51 Timed Defrost Disable
CnF52 Oil Return Algorithm
CnF53 Water Cool Oil Return Logic
CnF55 TXV Boost Relay
CnF56 TXV Boost Circuit
CnF59 Electronic Expansion Valve
CnF60 Compressor-Cycle Perishable Cooling
CnF61 ACT ASC Control Enable
CnF62 Extended Temperature Control Enable
CnF63 QUEST Pre-trip / TripWise Default State

4–25 T-370
4.10 Controller Function Codes

Table 4–7 Controller Function Codes

Code Title Description

NOTICE
If the function is not applicable, the display will read “-----”
Display Only Functions
Cd01 VFD (%) This is the percent capacity that the VFD is currently running at ranging from
0 - 100%. Therefore, this is the speed of the compressor as a percentage.
Cd03 VFD Status This is the current feedback value from the VFD. This code will display output
current (Amperes) by default.
Press the ENTER key to take the interface down into a selection menu.
The arrow keys will allow the operator to cycle forwards and backwards
through the following VFD-related quantities:
“CUr” (current draw in amps): x.x ranging from 0 to 99.9
“PEr” (speed of compressor as %): x ranging from 0 to 100
POW (power draw displayed in kilowatts): x.x ranging from 0.0 to 99.9
Press the ENTER key again to cause the selected quantity to be pulled up as
default, in future code select operations.
Press the CODE SELECT key in this selection menu to cancel the current
selection activity, and ascend into the main code selection menu.
Cd04 Line Current, The current is measured on three legs.
Phase A The current measured is used for control and diagnostic purposes.
For control processing, the highest of the Phase A and B current values is
Cd05 Line Current, used for current limiting purposes.
Phase B Phase C is used for compressor current draw measurement.
For diagnostic processing, the current draws are used to monitor component
generalization.
Cd06 Line Current,
Whenever a heater or a motor is turned ON or OFF, the current draw
Phase C
increase / decrease for that activity is measured.
The current draw is then tested to determine if it falls within the expected
range of values for the component.
Failure of this test will result in a Pre-trip failure or a control alarm indication.
Cd07 Mains Power Voltage The main supply voltage is displayed.
Cd08 Mains Power Frequency The value of the main power frequency is displayed in Hertz. The frequency
displayed will be halved if either fuse F1 or F2 is bad (alarm code AL21).
Cd09 Ambient Air The ambient sensor reading is displayed.
Temperature
Cd10 Evaporator Refrigerant The evaporator temperature of refrigerant measured leaving the evaporator.
Temperature (ETS)
Cd11 Compressor Discharge The compressor discharge temperature is displayed in °C or (°F).
Temperature (CPDS)
Cd12 Compressor Suction Bar (°C) presented with decimal. PSI (°F) no decimal.
Port Pressure (SPT)
Cd13 Flash Tank Pressure Bar (°C) presented with decimal. PSI (°F) no decimal.
(FPT)
Cd14 Compressor Discharge Bar (°C) presented with decimal. PSI (°F) no decimal.
Pressure (DPT)

T-370 4–26
 Table 4–7 Controller Function Codes
Code Title Description
Cd15 Unloader The status of the valve is displayed (“OPEn” − “CLOSE”).
Cd16 Compressor Motor Hour This code displays the compressor motor hours. Unit run time can be viewed
Meter, Unit Run Time by pressing the ENTER key while in Cd16. Total hours are recorded in
Hour Meter increments of 10 hours (i.e., 3000 hours is displayed as 300).
Compressor Motor Hour Meter display can be reset to 0 by pressing and
holding the ENTER key for 5 seconds. The Unit Run Time Hour Meter cannot
be reset using this code.
Cd17 Relative Humidity % Humidity Sensor (HS) reading is displayed. This code displays the relative
humidity, as a percent value.
Cd18 Software Revision The software revision number is displayed.
Number
Cd19 Battery Check Request battery test and display results. After selecting Cd19, press the
ENTER key to run the battery test. “——“, “btESt”, “PASS”, “”LOW”, “FAIL”.
Press and hold the ALT key for 2 seconds, then press the ENTER key with
ALT key still held down to clear the “Chargeable Battery Required” flag and
then the test is run. If ENTER is not pressed in 5 seconds, the controller
returns to display the setpoint.
Cd20 Container Unit Model This code displays the model for which the controller is configured. (i.e.,
Number / Configuration 69NT40-601-001 the display will show 01001. The model number for the unit
is listed on the Unit Nameplate, see Figure 2.1.
Cd21 Capacity Mode: Displays the current mode of operation “Unloaded, Standard, Economized,”
Unloaded, Standard, the mode of operation will be displayed as (“unld”, “Std”, “Econ”).
Economized
Cd22 Compressor Run State Displays the current compressor run state (“OFF”, “ON”).
Cd23 Evaporator Fan State Displays the current evaporator fan state (“OFF”, “LO”, “HI”).
Cd25 Time Remaining Until This code displays the time remaining until the unit goes into defrost (in
Defrost tenths of an hour). This value is based on actual accumulated compressor
running time.
Cd26 Defrost Termination Defrost Temperature Sensor reading is displayed.
Sensor Temperature
Configurable Functions

NOTICE
Function codes Cd27 through Cd37 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the
value of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd27 Defrost Interval This is the desired period of time between defrost cycles. “AUTO”, “OFF”, 3,
6, 9, 12, 24 Hours. Factory default is “AUTO”.
Cd28 Standard Temperature This parameter determines the default units (metric or British) for the system.
Unit The opposite units may be temporarily displayed with the C/F key. This
function code will display “—−“ if the controller Degree Celsius Lockout option
is set to F. The factory default value is Celsius units.

4–27 T-370
 Table 4–7 Controller Function Codes
Code Title Description
Cd29 User Selectable Failure This is the desired action to be taken should an alarm occur which severely
Response Code limits the capability of the control system. Depending upon what alarm has
occurred, the actual action taken may not be the same as the desired failure
action.
The user selects one of two possible actions as follows:
A - Evaporator Fan Only (Evap fans on high speed, n/a with frozen setpoints.)
d - Full System Shutdown - Factory Default (Shut down every component in
unit.)
Cd30 In-Range Tolerance The in-range tolerance will determine the band of temperatures around the
setpoint which will be designated as in-range. If the control temperature is in-
range, the in-range light will be illuminated. There are four possible values:
1 = +/- 0.5°C (+/- 0.9°F)
2 = +/- 1.0°C (+/- 1.8°F)
3 = +/- 1.5°C (+/- 2.7°F)
4 = +/- 2.0°C (+/- 3.6°F) - Factory Default
Cd32 System Current Limit The highest current draw of 460VAC Line Current Phase A, B, C is compared
to this limit and unit capacity may be reduced to limit current draw if current
limit is exceeded.
The five values for 460 VAC operation are: 15, 17, 19, 21, or 23 amperes.
The factory default setting is 21 amperes.
Cd33 Humidity Setpoint This is the value in percent to which the system will dehumidify.
There are configuration variables that determine whether dehumidification is
installed. In the test mode, the setpoint will be temporarily set to 1%, allowing
the test of dehumidification. After 5 minutes, the normal setpoint is restored.
If Pre-trip is initiated, this value will be set to “OFF” automatically.
Cd35 Bulb Mode The current state of the bulb mode option. “−−−−“, “nOr”, “bULb”
Cd36 Evaporator Fan Speed This is the desired evaporator fan speed for use during the bulb mode option.
“−−−−“, “ALt”, “LOW”, “HI”
Cd37 Variable DTT Setting This is the variable defrost termination thermostat setting to be used with the
optional bulb mode functionality. “—−−“, “nOr”
Display Only Functions
Cd38 Secondary Supply This item is only displayed if the DataCORDER is configured OFF and
configured for a four probe system. Dashes are displayed otherwise.
Cd39 Secondary Return This item is only displayed if the DataCORDER is configured OFF and
configured for a four probe system. Dashes are displayed otherwise.
Cd40 Container ID Cd40 is configured at commissioning to read a valid container identification
number. The reading will not display alpha characters; only the numeric
portion of the number will display. See Section 7.19.3 Controller
Programming Procedure for additional information.
Cd45 Vent Position This function code will be dashed out if not configured for VPS. This function
code displays current vent position in units of 5 CMH (units displayed as
“CM”) or closes CFM (units displayed as “CF”) depending on the selection of
Cd 46 (Airflow display units), Cd 28 (Metric/Imperial) or the pressing of the
deg C/F key.
CFM displayed as “CF”, CMH displayed as “CM”.
Values: 0 to 240 for UPPER / 0 to 225 for LOWER

T-370 4–28
 Table 4–7 Controller Function Codes
Code Title Description
Cd46 Air Flow Display Units Selects the airflow units to be displayed by Function Code 45 (Cd 45) if
configured for Vent Position Sensor or displayed by “FLO” under Cd 43 if
configured for Autoslide. CF= Cubic Feet per Minute, CM=Cubic Meters per
Hour, bOth=Displays either CF or CM depending on the setting of Cd 28
(Metric/Imperial) or the pressing of the degree C/F key.
Default − “bOth” If configured for Vent Position Sensor or Autoslide
Cd48 Dehumidification / Bulb Initially Cd48 will display current dehumidification-mode; bUlb - bulb cargo
Cargo Mode Parameter mode, dEhUM - normal dehumidification, or OFF - off. This display is steady.
Selection Press the ENTER key to take the interface down into a hierarchy of
parameter selection menus (mode, setpoint, evaporator speed, DTT setting).
Press the ENTER key in any parameter selection menu to commit to
selection of the currently displayed parameter and cause the interface to
descend into the next parameter selection menu. All parameter selection
menus alternate between a blank display and the current selection in the right
hand display.
Press the CODE SELECT key in a selection menu to cancel the current
selection activity and ascend back up to the next higher selection menu (or
to Cd48 display mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds, the interface reverts
to normal system display and the current selection menu is canceled, but any
previously committed changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configuration
options and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Whenever any Pre-trip test is initiated, dehumidification mode goes to OFF.
Whenever dehumidification mode goes to OFF:
• Dehumidification control setpoint goes to 0% RH internally but will
then initialize to 95% RH when dehumidification mode leaves OFF.
• Evaporator speed select goes to Alt for units without PWM Compres-
sor Control (Cnf57 = Out), Evaporator speed select goes to Hi for
units with PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = In).
• DTT setting goes to 25.6°C or 18.0°C, depending on Cnf41.
Whenever dehumidification-mode is set to bUlb, DTT setting goes to 18.0°C
if it had been set higher.
Whenever dehumidification-mode is set to dEhUM, DTT setting goes to
25.6°C or 18.0°C, depending on Cnf41.
For units without PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = Out):
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set below 65% RH
evaporator speed select goes to LO if it had been set to Hi.
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set above 64% RH
evaporator speed select goes to Alt if it had been set to LO.
For units with PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = In):
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is below 60% RH, evapo-
rator fan speed is set to LO, the user can set evaporator fan speed to
Hi via the keypad.
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set equal to or above
60% RH, the evaporator fan speed is set to Hi, the user has the ability
to set the evaporator fan speed to LO via the keypad.

4–29 T-370
 Table 4–7 Controller Function Codes
Code Title Description
Cd49 Days Since Last Display number of days since last successful completion. Press the ENTER
Successful Pre-trip key for number of days since successful Pre-trip completion for Auto1, Auto2,
and Auto3 in sequence.
Press the CODE SELECT key to step back through list and ultimately exit
CD49 display.
Cd51 Automatic Cold Automatic Cold Treatment (ACT) mode:
Treatment Parameter Cd51 increments of (1 day)_(1hr), Display: default “0_0 “
Selection
“done” mm-dd this will be display is ACT has completed
“ACt” value “On” “OFF” or “----“Display / Select: default “OFF“
“trEAt” value °C / °F on 0.1 degree increments Display / Select: default
“0.0°C“
“DAyS” value “0-99” increments of 1 Display / Select: default “0”
“ProbE” value Probe positions ex ’1 2 _ 4’ ’1 _ 3 _’ Display: default “---- “
“SPnEW” value °C / °F on 0.1° increments Display / Select: default “10.0°C “
Initially Cd51 will display current countdown timer increments of (1
day)_(1hr), default “0_0”.
See Section 4.8.1 for procedure to set ACT using Cd51.
Pressing the ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of
parameter selection menus (act, treat, days, probe and spnew setting).
Pressing the ENTER key in any of the parameter selection menus commits
to selection of the currently displayed parameter and causes the interface to
descend into the next parameter selection menu. All parameter selection
menus alternate between a blank display and the current selection in the right
hand display.
Pressing the CODE SELECT key in a selection menu cancels the current
selection activity and ascends back up to the next higher selection menu (or
to Cd51 display mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds, the interface reverts
to normal system display and the current selection menu is cancelled, but
any previously committed changes are retained.
Parameter with the exception of “Act” may not be altered if Cd51 is re-entered
if “Act” is “On”. When ACT has completed including reaching the new setpoint
“done” on the left display and the MONTH DAY of completion on the right
display will be displayed as the second entry in the menu. Turning ACT off
clears this entry. This action also resets Cd51 to initial time remaining. ACT
must then be turned on to view or modify the additional parameters.
Whenever any auto Pre-trip test or Trip Start is initiated, ACT mode goes to
OFF.

T-370 4–30
 Table 4–7 Controller Function Codes
Code Title Description
Cd53 Automatic Setpoint Automatic Setpoint Change (ASC) Mode:
Change Mode Cd53 increments of (1 day)_(1hr), Display: default “0_0”
Parameter Selection
“done” mm-dd this will be display is ASC has completed
“ASC” value “On” “OFF” Display / Select: default “OFF“
“nSC” value “1 - 6” (This is the value “n” for the subsequent entries).
“SP (n-1)” value °C / °F on 0.1 degree increments Display / Select: default
“10.0°C“
“DAY (n-1)” value “1 – 99” increments of 1 Display / Select: default “1“
“SP (n)” value °C / °F on 0.1 degree increments Display / Select: default
“10.0°C
Initially Cd53 will display current countdown timer increments of (1
day)_(1hr), default “0_0”.
Pressing the ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of
parameter selection menus, (mode, act, treat, days, probe and spnew
setting).
Pressing the ENTER key in any of the parameter selection menus selects the
currently displayed parameter and causes the interface to descend into the
next parameter selection menu. All parameter selection menus alternate
between a blank display and the current selection in the right hand display.
Pressing the CODE SELECT key in a selection menu cancels the current
selection activity and ascends back up to the next higher selection menu (or
to Cd53 display mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds, the interface reverts
to normal system display and the current selection menu is cancelled, but
any previously committed changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configuration
options and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Parameter with the exception of “ASC” may not be altered if Cd53 is re-
entered if “ASC” is “On”. When ASC has completed including reaching the
last setpoint “done” on the left display and the MONTH DAY of completion on
the right display will be displayed as the second entry in the menu. Turning
ASC off clears this entry. This action also resets Cd53 to initial time
remaining. ASC must then be turned on to view or modify the additional
parameters.
Whenever any auto Pre-trip test or Trip Start is initiated, ASC mode goes to OFF.
Cd54 Superheat Values Evaporator superheat: Evaporator leaving temperature minus suction
saturation temperature as calculated from suction pressure.
Cd55 Discharge Superheat Cd55 will display discharge superheat (discharge temperature minus
discharge saturation temperature as calculated from discharge pressure)
values in C / F as calculated by the discharge temperature minus the
discharge saturation temperature as calculated from discharge pressure. “--
---” will be displayed if selection is not valid.
Cd58 Water Pressure Switch This code is only displayed if the unit is configured for water-cooled
State condenser option. Values for this code are: “----”, “OPEN”, “CLOSE”.
Cd61 VFD Bypass Mode When this code is active it signifies the unit is operating in a LIMP HOME
MODE Condition.
Cd61 is locked out, and should only be activated after the VFD bypass pro-
cedure has been completed (see Section 7.20.2).
Cd68 EEV % Opening Displays the current percent opening of EEV (0-100%).
Cd69 HPXV % Opening Displays the current percent opening of HPXV (0-100%).

4–31 T-370
 Figure 4.11 Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence

Start
Troubleshooting

Unit does No Check Power Refer to CONNECT POWER

self test? Supply
Section 5.2

Yes

Did
Evaporator No Check Power Refer to CONNECT POWER
fans start? Supply Section 5.2

Yes

Correct No Install Latest Refer to CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

software Software Section 4.2
version? Revision

Yes

Unit Load correct

configured No Refer to Configuration Software (Variables)
unit
correctly? configuration Section 4.2.1

Yes

See alarm
Active Yes details & Refer to Controller Alarm Indications
Alarms? repair Table 4–8

No

Pass No Refer to Pre-trip Diagnostics

Pre-trip Correct
inspection? all faults Section 4.6

Yes

Operating No Correct Refer to REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

pressures Refrigerant SERVICE
normal? issue Section 7.2
Yes

Unit OK

T-370 4–32
4.11 Controller Alarm Indications

Table 4–8 Controller Alarm Codes

AL03 Loss of Superheat Control
Cause: Superheat has remained below 1.66°C (3°F) degrees for five minutes continuously while the
compressor is running. Compressor is drawing more than 2.0 amps, compressor pressure ratio is
greater than 1.8, and Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) is at 0% open.
Component Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
Troubleshooting Allow unit to run. Monitor superheat control (Cd54) and EEV position
(Cd68). Remove the service panel and inspect the EEV for icing. Stepper
driver may be installed to attempt to manually control the valve driver.
Check connections between the EEV and power pack and also between
the power pack and controller. Check resistance of EEV coils.
Corrective Action If the problem may be corrected using a manual electronic stepper drive
tool, replace the EEV control module. If the unit does not respond to icing
on the EEV outlet (Evaporator inlet) it may indicate a physically damaged
valve. Replace the EEV.
Component Compressor
Troubleshooting Check VFD Speed (Cd01), Suction Pressure (Cd12), and Flash Tank
Pressure (Cd13). If the compressor speed is greater than 70% and the
flash tank pressure is approximately equal to suction pressure with the
HPXV controlling at less than 25% (Cd69), then there may be a
compressor first stage failure. This condition will also increase compressor
discharge temperature (Cd11) and may also demonstrate AL19 alarms.
Heavy icing on flash tanks will also be seen.
Corrective Action
Component Evaporator Temperature Sensors (ETS and ETS1)
Troubleshooting Verify the accuracy of the sensors ETS and ETS1. Refer to the Sensor
Checkout Procedure (Section 7.22).
Corrective Action Replace ETS or ETS1 if it is defective.
Component Evaporator Fans
Troubleshooting Confirm fans are operating properly.
Corrective Action Replace fan(s) if it is defective. Refer to Evaporator Fan Motor Assembly
(Section 7.13).

AL05 Manual Defrost Switch Failure

Cause: Controller has detected continuous Manual Defrost Switch activity for five minutes or more.
Component Keypad
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit.
Corrective Action Resetting the unit may correct problem. Monitor the unit.
If the alarm reappears after 5 minutes, replace the keypad.

4–33 T-370
AL06 Keypad or Keypad Harness Failure
Cause: Controller has detected continuous activity from one of the keypad keys.
Component Keypad or Harness
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit.
Corrective Action Resetting the unit may correct problem. Monitor the unit.
If the alarm reappears, replace the keypad and harness.

AL07 Fresh Air Vent Open

Cause: The Vent Position Sensor (VPS) is reading greater than 0 CMH while the unit is in frozen mode.
Component Vent Position Sensor (VPS)
Troubleshooting Manually reposition the vent and confirm the position using Cd45. Refer
to VPS Service (Section 7.21).
Corrective Action If unable to obtain a zero reading, replace the defective VPS.

AL13 VFD Communication Alarm

Cause: ML3 controller loses reliable communication with the VFD (no response for 3 seconds).
Make sure that the latest unit software is installed and re-run the unit to see if the alarm comes back.
If the alarm does not clear, then follow troubleshooting.
Component VFD, VFD Bridge, Controller
Troubleshooting Check continuity of the KH connector. Power cycle the unit.
Corrective Action If the alarm immediately re-occurs after a few seconds, allow to remain
active and perform the VFD Bypass procedure (Section 7.20.2).
Component Compressor IP
Troubleshooting Confirm motor IP and HPS is closed between KA2 and TP2.
Corrective Action If IP is open, replace the compressor. If HPS is open, replace the HPS.

AL14 Phase Sequence Detect Fault

Cause: Controller is unable to determine the correct phase relationship.
Component N/A
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit.
Corrective Action Resetting the unit may correct the problem. Monitor the unit.
Component Wiring
Troubleshooting Check unit wiring.
Corrective Action Correct wiring.
Component Current Sensor
Troubleshooting Compare function codes Cd04, Cd05, and Cd06 against manual current
draw readings.
Corrective Action Replace the current sensor if there is discrepancy between manual and
display readings.

T-370 4–34
AL15 Loss of Cooling
Cause: Evaporator efficiency monitor has detected a loss of system capacity, likely due to a drop in
refrigerant charge density.
Component Refrigerant Charge
Troubleshooting Check units for leaks, paying careful attention to high side fittings.
Check Pressure Relief Valves (Section 7.7) to see if refrigerant has
been released and replace if necessary.
Check for signs of unit running short of refrigerant: Codes Cd12 and
Cd13 along with high superheat at Cd54 and EEV open more than
standard operation, up to 100% at Cd68.
Corrective Action Rectify refrigerant leaks. Remove refrigerant charge (Section 7.2.5),
evacuate the unit (Section 7.2.7), and recharge the unit to rated charge
(Section 7.2.8).
Component Evaporator
Troubleshooting Check for excessive ice buildup on the coil, T-bar blockages, or fouling.
Corrective Action Defrost the coil.

AL18 Discharge Pressure High

Cause: Discharge pressure is above 131 bar (1900 psig).
Component High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV), Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit.
Check operation of the valves during power up.
Verify that the HPXV coil is fully seated on the stem of the HPXV body
(see Section 7.15.2).
Corrective Action Alarm will clear once pressures are within operating limits.
Component Refrigerant Lines
Troubleshooting Measure temperatures before and after all fittings and braze joints,
paying careful attention to screen locations. Temperature drops may
indicate internal blockages. Unit over-charge or under-charge may
create pressure control problems related to charge density and
compression ratio. Ensure that the unit refrigerant charge is within
operational specifications for the model.
Corrective Action Rectify system blockages. Remove refrigerant charge (Section 7.2.5),
evacuate the unit (Section 7.2.7), and recharge the unit to rated charge
(Section 7.2.8).
Component Gas Cooler Fan and Motor
Troubleshooting Check the gas cooler fan and motor for excessive coil fouling and proper
operation.
Corrective Action Replace the gas cooler fan motor.

4–35 T-370
AL19 Discharge Temperature High
Cause: Discharge temperature is above 135°C (275°F).
Component Restrictions in the refrigeration system
Troubleshooting Check the unit for air flow restrictions.
Corrective Action Clean or remove any debris from the coils.
Component Non-condensables in the refrigeration system.
Troubleshooting With the unit off, allow system to stabilize to ambient temperature.
Check system pressure against the Pressure / Temperature Chart for
R744 (Table 7–4). Refer to function codes Cd12, Cd13 and Cd14.
Corrective Action Remove refrigerant charge (Section 7.2.5), evacuate the unit (Section
7.2.7), and recharge the unit (Section 7.2.8).
Component Compressor
Troubleshooting Check VFD Speed (Cd01), Suction Pressure (Cd12), and Flash Tank
Pressure (Cd13). If the compressor speed is greater than 70% and the
Flash Tank pressure is approximately equal to suction pressure with the
High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV) controlling at less than 25%
(Cd69), there may be a compressor first stage failure. This condition will
also increase compressor discharge temperature (Cd11) and may also
demonstrate AL03 alarms.
Corrective Action If the alarm persists, it may indicate a failing compressor. Replace the
compressor, refer to Compressor Service (Section 7.3).
Component Refrigerant Charge
Troubleshooting Check unit for leaks, paying careful attention to high side fittings. Unit
over-charge or under-charge may create pressure control problems
related to charge density and compression ratio. Ensure the unit
refrigerant charge is within operational specifications for the model.
Check Pressure Relief Valves (Section 7.7) to see if refrigerant has
been released and replace if necessary.
Check for signs that the unit is running short of refrigerant. Check
Compressor Suction Pressure (Cd12) and Flash Tank Pressure (Cd13).
Check for high superheat (Cd54) and EEV open more than standard
operation, up to 100% (Cd68).
Corrective Action Rectify refrigerant leaks, vacuum and re-charge the system to rated
charge.

T-370 4–36
AL20 Control Contactor Fuse (F3)
Cause: Control power fuse (F3A or F3B) is open.
Component Fuse F3A
Troubleshooting If fuse F3A is open, check PA, PB, and CH coils for short to ground. If a
short is found, the coil is defective. Check ESV coil resistance at TP7 to
TP9, and USV coil resistance at TP1 to TP9. If short to ground, or if
resistance is less than 4 ohms, the coil is defective.
Corrective Action Replace the defective coil.
Replace the fuse.
Component Fuse F3B
Troubleshooting If fuse F3B is open, check contactor coils GF, GS, ES, EF, HR, for a
short to ground. If a short is found, the coil is defective.
Corrective Action Replace the defective coil.
Replace the fuse.
Component Controller
Troubleshooting Check voltage at QC1. If voltage is present, it indicates a defective
microprocessor.
Corrective Action Refer to Controller Service (Section 7.19).

AL21 Control Circuit Fuse (F1/F2)

Cause: One of the 18 VAC controller fuses (F1 / F2) is open. Refer to code Cd08.
Component System Sensors
Troubleshooting Check system sensors for short to ground.
Corrective Action Replace defective sensor(s).
Component Wiring
Troubleshooting Check wiring for short to ground.
Corrective Action Repair as needed.
Component Controller
Troubleshooting Controller may have an internal short.
Corrective Action Replace controller. Refer to Controller Service (Section 7.19).

AL22 Evaporator IP
Cause: Evaporator motor internal protector (IP) is open.
Component Evaporator Motor
Troubleshooting Shut down the unit, disconnect power and check evaporator motor IP at
plug connection pins 4 & 6.
Corrective Action Replace the defective evaporator fan motor. Refer to Evaporator Fan
Motor Service (Section 7.13).

AL23 Loss of Phase B

Cause: Controller fails to detect current draw.
Component Incoming Power
Troubleshooting Check incoming power source.
Corrective Action Correct power source as required.

4–37 T-370
AL24 Compressor IP
Cause: Compressor internal protector (IP) is open for greater than five seconds.
Component Compressor
Troubleshooting Confirm motor IP is open at KA2 to KB9. Verify the High Pressure Switch
(HPS) is closed.
Corrective Action Monitor the unit. If the alarm remains active or is repetitive, replace the
compressor at the next available opportunity. Refer to Compressor
Service (Section 7.3).

AL25 Gas Cooler Motor IP

Cause: Gas cooler fan motor internal protector (IP) is open.
Component Insufficient Air Flow
Troubleshooting Shut down the unit and check the gas cooler fan for obstructions.
Corrective Action Remove obstructions.
Component Gas Cooler Fan Motor
Troubleshooting Shut down the unit, disconnect power and check the gas cooler fan
motor IP at plug connection pins 4 & 6. Or, on the controller between
TP3 and TP4 if the Water Cooled Condenser is not fitted or water is
disconnected.
Corrective Action Replace defective gas cooler fan motor. Refer to Gas Cooler Fan Motor
Assembly Service (Section 7.9).

AL26 All Sensors Failure: Supply/Return Probes

Cause: Sensors detected as out of range.
Component Sensors
Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5.
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.
If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5. Refer to
Temperature Sensor Service (Section 7.22).

AL27 Analog to Digital Accuracy Failure

Cause: Controller AD converter faulty.
Component Controller
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit. If the alarm persists, it indicates a defective
microprocessor.
Corrective Action Replace the defective microprocessor. Refer to Controller Service
(Section 7.19).

T-370 4–38
AL28 Low Suction Pressure
Cause: Suction pressure is less than 5.5 bar (80 psi), or less than 6.2 bar (90 psi) for 300 seconds.
Component Refrigerant Charge
Troubleshooting Check units for leaks, paying careful attention to high side fittings.
Check Pressure Relief Valves (Section 7.7) to see if refrigerant has
been released and replace if necessary.
Check for signs that the unit is running short of refrigerant. Check
Compressor Suction Pressure (Cd12) and Flash Tank Pressure
(Cd13). Check for high superheat (Cd54) and Electronic Expansion
Valve (EEV) open more than standard operation, up to 100% (Cd68).
Corrective Action Rectify refrigerant leaks, vacuum and re-charge the system to rated
charge.
Component Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit.
Corrective Action Resetting the unit may correct the problem. Monitor the unit.
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate SPT pressure readings. Refer to Manifold Gauge Set
procedures (Section 7.2).
Corrective Action Replace SPT if it is defective.

AL50 Air Vent Position Sensor (VPS)

Cause: Vent Position Sensor (VPS) out of range.
Component Vent Position Sensor (VPS)
Troubleshooting Make sure the VPS is secure.
Corrective Action Manually tighten the panel.
Troubleshooting The user is allowed five minutes to make necessary adjustments to the
vent setting, and then five minutes of stability are required following the
last movement to consider the vent position stable. If vent position
changes are detected during the required stability period, an alarm will
be generated. The alarm will also be generated if the VPS is invalid.
Corrective Action If the alarm persists, replace the VPS or the sensor assembly.

AL51 EEPROM Failure

Cause: Controller Memory Failure
Alarm List Failure, bad queue marker, or EEPROM hardware error detected for 3 seconds.
Component Controller
Troubleshooting Press the ENTER key when “CLEAr” is displayed to attempt to clear the
alarm.
Corrective Action If the action to clear alarm is successful (all alarms are inactive), alarm
51 will be reset.
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit. If the alarm persists, it indicates defective
controller memory.
Corrective Action Replace the defective controller. Refer to Controller Service (Section
7.19).

4–39 T-370
AL52 EEPROM Alarm List Full
Cause: Alarm list queue is full.
Component Active Alarms
Troubleshooting Repair any alarms in the queue that are active. These are indicated by
“AA”.
Corrective Action Clear alarms. Refer to the Controller Alarms table (Section 4.5).

AL53 Battery Pack Failure

Cause: Battery voltage low.
Component Battery
Troubleshooting If this alarm occurs on start up, allow a unit fitted with rechargeable
batteries to operate for up to 24 hours to charge rechargeable batteries
sufficiently. Once fully charged, the alarm will deactivate.
Corrective Action To clear the alarm, press the ENTER and ALT keys simultaneously at
the startup of Cd19 (Battery Check).
If the alarm persists, replace the battery pack. Refer to Battery
Replacement procedure (Section 7.19.5).

AL54 Primary Supply Sensor (STS)

Cause: Invalid Supply Temperature Sensor (STS) reading.
Component Supply Temperature Sensor (STS)
Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5.
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.
If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5. Refer to
Temperature Sensor Service (Section 7.22).

AL56 Primary Return Sensor (RTS)

Cause: Invalid Return Temperature Sensor (RTS) reading.
Component Return Temperature Sensor (RTS)
Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5.
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.
If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5. Refer to
Temperature Sensor Service (Section 7.22).

AL57 Ambient Sensor (AMBS)

Cause: Invalid Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS) reading.
Component Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS)
Troubleshooting Test the AMBS. Refer to Temperature Sensor Service (Section 7.22).
Corrective Action If AMBS is defective, replace it. Refer to Temperature Sensor Service
(Section 7.22).

T-370 4–40
AL58 Compressor High Pressure Safety (HPS)
Cause: High pressure safety switch has opened and reset within five seconds, triggering a high pressure
shutdown state.
Component High Pressure Switch (HPS)
Troubleshooting Test the HPS. Refer to Checking High Pressure Switch procedure
(Section 7.5.1). Run a P7 test to verify the operation of the HPS.
Corrective Action Replace the HPS if it is defective. Refer to Sensor Replacement
procedure (Section 7.5.2).
Component Refrigeration System
Troubleshooting Measure temperatures before and after all fittings and braze joints
paying careful attention to screen locations. Temperature drops may
indicate internal blockages. Unit over-charge may create pressure
control problems. Ensure unit refrigerant charge is within operational
specifications for the model. Check unit for air flow restrictions.
Corrective Action Clean or remove any debris from coils. Rectify system blockages.
Remove refrigerant charge (Section 7.2.5), evacuate the unit (Section
7.2.7), and recharge the unit (Section 7.2.8).
Component High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV)
Troubleshooting Verify that the HPXV coil is fully seated on the stem of the HPXV body
(see Section 7.15.2). Attempt to manually open the valve with magnet.
If this rectifies the problem, replace the stepper motor. Check
resistance of HPXV coils.
Corrective Action Replace the HPXV.

AL59 Heater Termination Thermostat (HTT)

Cause: Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT) is open.
Component Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT)
Troubleshooting Check for 24 volts at test point TP10. If there is no voltage at TP10 after
unit has reached setpoint, HTT is open.
Corrective Action Replace HTT if it is defective.

AL60 Defrost Termination Sensor (DTS)

Cause: Failure of the Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) to open. This is an indication of a probable failure
of the DTS. It is triggered by the opening of the HTT or the failure of the DTS to go above setpoint
within two hours of defrost initiation.
After 1/2 hour with a frozen range setpoint, or 1/2 hour of continuous compressor run time, if return
air falls below 7°C (45°F), the controller checks to ensure the DTS reading has dropped to 10°C or
below. If not, a DTS failure alarm is given and defrost mode is operated using the Return
Temperature Sensor (RTS). Defrost mode will be terminated after one hour by the controller.
Component Defrost Termination Sensor (DTS)
Troubleshooting Test the DTS. Refer to Temperature Sensor Service (Section 7.22).
Corrective Action Replace the DTS if it is defective. Refer to Temperature Sensor Service
(Section 7.22).

4–41 T-370
AL61 Heater Current Draw Fault
Cause: Improper current draw during heat or defrost mode.
Component Heater(s)
Troubleshooting While in heat or defrost mode, check for proper current draw at the
Heater Contactors (HR). Refer to Electrical Data (Section 3.4).
Corrective Action Replace the heater(s) if it is defective. Refer to Evaporator Coil &
Heater Assembly (Section 7.11).
Component Contactor
Troubleshooting Check voltage at the Heater Contactor (HR) on the heater side.
Corrective Action If no voltage present, replace the Heater Contactor (HR) if it is
defective.

AL63 Current Limit

Cause: Unit operating above current limit.
Component Refrigeration System
Troubleshooting Check unit for air flow restrictions.
Corrective Action Clean or remove any debris from coils.
Troubleshooting Check unit for proper operation.
Corrective Action Repair as needed.
Component Power Supply
Troubleshooting Confirm supply voltage / frequency is within specification and balanced
according to Electrical Data (Section 3.4).
Corrective Action Correct power supply.
Troubleshooting Current limit set too low. Check current limit setting at Cd32.
Corrective Action The current limit can be raised (maximum of 23 amps) using Cd32.

AL64 Discharge Temperature Sensor (CPDS)

Cause: Discharge Temperature Sensor (CPDS) out of range.
Component Discharge Temperature Sensor (CPDS)
Troubleshooting Test the CPDS. Refer to Temperature Sensor Service (Section 7.22).
Reference Cd11 for sensor values.
Corrective Action Replace the CPDS if it is defective. Refer to Temperature Sensor
Service (Section 7.22).

AL65 Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)

Cause: Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) is out of range.
Component Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate DPT pressure readings. Refer to Manifold Gauge Set
procedures (Section 7.2). Reference Cd14 for transducer values.
Corrective Action Replace the DPT if it is defective.

T-370 4–42
AL66 Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
Cause: Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT) out of range.
Component Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate SPT pressure readings. Refer to Manifold Gauge Set
procedures (Section 7.2). Reference Cd12 for transducer values.
Corrective Action Replace SPT if it is defective.
Troubleshooting Monitor the unit.
Corrective Action If the alarm persists, it may indicate a failing compressor. Refer to
Compressor Service (Section 7.3).

AL67 Humidity Sensor (HS)

Cause: Humidity Sensor (HS) reading out of range.
Humidity Sensor (HS) below 2% or greater than four volts.
Component Humidity Sensor (HS)
Troubleshooting Make sure HS is properly connected in the socket.
Make sure HS wires are not damaged.
Reference Cd17 for sensor values.
Corrective Action Monitor and replace the HS if the alarm persists.

AL68 Flash Tank Pressure Transducer Alarm

Cause: Flash Tank Pressure Transducer (FPT) is out of range.
Component Flash Tank Pressure Transducer (FPT)
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate FPT pressure readings. It is not possible to check FPT
with gauges. Turn off the unit and let the pressure equalize, check that
codes Cd12, Cd13 and Cd14 are all equal.
Corrective Action Replace the FPT if it is defective.

AL69 Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1)

Cause: Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1) out of range.
Component Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1)
Troubleshooting Test the ETS1. Refer to Temperature Sensor Service (Section 7.22).
Refer to Cd10 for sensor values.
Corrective Action Replace the ETS1 if it is defective.

AL70 Secondary Supply Sensor (SRS)

Cause: Secondary Supply Sensor (SRS) is out of range.
Component Secondary Supply Sensor (SRS)
Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5.
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.
If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5. Refer to
Temperature Sensor Service (Section 7.22).

4–43 T-370
AL71 Secondary Return Sensor (RRS)
Cause: Secondary Return Sensor (RRS) is out of range.
Component Secondary Return Sensor (RRS)
Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5.
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.
If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5. Refer to
Temperature Sensor Service (Section 7.22).

AL72 Control Temperature Out of Range

Cause: After the unit goes in-range for 30 minutes then out of range for a continuous 120 minutes.
Component Refrigeration System
Troubleshooting Ensure that the unit is operating correctly.
Corrective Action Power cycle the unit.
Control temperature is in-range.
Any pre-trip mode resets the timers.

AL92 VFD Internal Fault

Cause: Internal fault occurred in the Variable Frequency Drive (VFD).
Component VFD
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit.
Corrective Action If alarm cannot be reset, perform a VFD bypass procedure (Section
7.20.2).

AL93 VFD Fan Fault

Cause: Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) temperature feedback exceeds 55°C (131°F).
Make sure that the latest unit software is installed and re-run the unit to see if the alarm comes
back. If the alarm does not clear, then follow troubleshooting.
Component VFD Fan
Troubleshooting Ensure that the fan inlet and outlets are clear and fan is free to rotate.
Corrective Action Remove and replace the VFD Fan (Section 7.20.1).

AL94 VFD Trip Alarm

Cause: An internal Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) alarm has been detected.
Component Compressor
Troubleshooting Verify compressor oil level and condition.
Corrective Action Charge compressor with oil.
Component VFD
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit.
Corrective Action If alarm cannot be reset, perform a VFD bypass procedure (Section
7.20.2).

T-370 4–44
 AL95 Gas Cooler Outlet Temperature
Cause: Gas Cooler outlet temperature is out of range.
Component Gas Cooler
Troubleshooting Check for dirt, debris and blockage of the Gas Cooler. Check continuity
at connector KH.
Corrective Action Remove any blockage in the Gas Cooler coil.
Component Gas Cooler Temperature Sensor (GCTS)
Troubleshooting Check the operation of the GCTS.
Corrective Action Replace the GCTS if necessary. See Section 7.8.

AL97 High Flash Tank Pressure

Cause: Flash tank pressure is greater than 104 bar (1508 psi).
Component Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
Troubleshooting Remove the service panel and inspect the EEV for icing. Stepper driver
may be installed to attempt to manually control valve driver.
Corrective Action If the problem may be corrected using a manual electronic stepper drive
tool, replace the EEV control module. If the unit does not respond to
icing on the EEV outlet (Evaporator inlet), it may indicate a physically
damaged valve. Replace the EEV. Check resistance of EEV coils.
Component Refrigerant Charge
Troubleshooting High refrigerant charge will over-pressurize the flash tank and prevent
economized operation. Check that Flash pressure is not higher than 69
bar (1000 psi) during operation.
Corrective Action Remove refrigerant charge (Section 7.2.5), evacuate the unit (Section
7.2.7), and recharge the unit (Section 7.2.8) to rated charge.
Component Gas Cooler
Troubleshooting Check Gas Cooler fan and motor for excessive coil fouling and proper
operation.
Corrective Action Replace the Gas Cooler fan motor.

NOTICE
If the controller is configured for four probes without a DataCORDER, the DataCORDER alarms
AL70 and AL71 will be processed as Controller alarms AL70 and AL71. Refer to Table 4–5.

The controller performs self-check routines. If an internal failure occurs, an “ERR” alarm will appear on the display.
This is an indication the controller needs to be replaced. In the event that a failure occurs and the display cannot be
updated, the status LED will indicate the appropriate ERR code using Morse code as shown below.

ERR 0 . .−. .−. −−−−−

Cause: RAM failure
Description Indicates that the controller working memory has failed.

ERR 1 . .−. .−. . −−−−

Cause: Program Memory failure
Description Indicates a problem with the controller program.

4–45 T-370
ERR 2 . .−. .−. . . −−−
Cause: Watchdog time-out
Description The controller program has entered a mode whereby the controller program has
stopped executing.

ERR 3 . .−. .−. . . . −−

Cause: N/A
Description N/A

ERR 4 . .−. .−. . . . . −

Cause: N/A
Description N/A

ERR 5 . .−. .−. . . . . .

Cause: A−D failure
Description The controller’s Analog to Digital (A−D) converter has failed.

ERR 6 . .−. .−. −. . . .

Cause: IO Board failure
Description Internal program/update failure.

ERR 7 . .−. .−. −−. . .

Cause: Controller failure
Description Internal version/firmware incompatible.

ERR 8 . .−. .−. −−−. .

Cause: DataCORDER failure
Description Internal DataCORDER memory failure.

ERR 9 . .−. .−. −−−− .

Cause: Controller failure
Description Internal controller memory failure.

Entr StPt Enter Set point (Press Arrow & Enter)

Cause: The controller is prompting the operator to enter a setpoint.

LO Low Main Voltage (Cd27-38 disabled, NO alarm stored.)

Cause: This message will be alternately displayed with the setpoint whenever the supply voltage is less
than 75% of its proper value.

T-370 4–46
4.12 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes

Code Title Description

NOTICE
“Auto” or “Auto1” menu includes the: P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6 and rSLts.
“Auto2” menu includes P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9, P10 and rSLts.
“Auto3” menu includes P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7 and P8.
P0-0 Pre-trip Initiated Setup: The display shows, in sequence, Container identifier code, software
revision number (Cd18), container unit model number (Cd20), and
configuration database identifier CFMMYYDD.
Next the unit indicates the presence of an RMU according to whether any
RMU inquiry messages have been received since the unit was booted.
Units equipped with Autoslide (Cnf44) will position the vent to closed,
followed by two sequences of opening to 100% and returning to the closed
position. No other Autoslide mode of operation will be available until the two
cycles of opening and closing have completed.
Pass / Fail Criteria: Since the system cannot recognize lights and display
failures, there are no test codes or results associated with this phase of Pre-
trip.
To know if the test passes the operator must visually observe that the LCD
display elements and the indicator lights function.

P1 Tests - Heaters Current Draw: Heater is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within specified range. No
other system components will change state during this test.
Code Title Description
P1-0 Heaters Turned On Setup: Heater starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and then
the heater is turned on. After 15 seconds on, the current draw is measured
again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Pass / Fail Criteria: Test passes if current draw change is within the range
specified.
P1-1 Heaters Turned Off Setup: Heater is then turned off. After 10 seconds the current draw is
measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Pass / Fail Criteria: Test passes if current draw change is within the range
specified.

P2 Tests - Gas Cooler Fan Current Draw: Gas Cooler fan is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within
specified range. No other system components will change state during this test. If the Water Pressure Switch is
open this test will be skipped.
Code Title Description
P2-0 Gas Cooler Fan, Setup: Gas Cooler fan starts in the off condition, current draw is measured,
Low Speed On Test and Gas Cooler low speed fan is then turned on. After 10 seconds the current
draw is measured again. The change in current draw is then recorded. After
the current is measured the Gas Cooler fan is turned off and after 2 seconds
a second off measurement is taken.
Pass / Fail Criteria: Test passes if current draw is in the specified range.
P2-1 Gas Cooler Fan, Setup: Gas Cooler fan starts in the off condition, current draw is measured,
High Speed On Test and Gas Cooler high speed fan is then turned on. After 15 seconds the
current draw is measured again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
After the current is measured the Gas Cooler fan is turned off and after 15
seconds a second off measurement is taken.
Pass / Fail Criteria: Test passes if current draw is in the specified range.

4–47 T-370
P3 Tests - Low Speed Evaporator Fan Current Draw: Low speed evaporator fan is turned on, then off. Current
draw must fall within specified range. No other system components will change state during this test.
Code Title Description
P3-0 Low Speed Setup: Evaporator fans start in the off condition, current draw is measured,
Evaporator Fans On and then low speed evaporator fans will be turned on. After 10 seconds the
Test current draw is measured again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Pass / Fail Criteria: Test passes if current draw is in the specified range.
P3-1 Low Speed Setup: Low speed evaporator fans are then turned off. After 2 seconds the
Evaporator Fans Off current draw is measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test Pass / Fail Criteria: Test passes if current draw is in the specified range.

P4 Tests - High Speed Evaporator Fan Current Draw: High speed evaporator fans are turned on, then off. Cur-
rent draw must fall within specified range and measured current changes must exceed specified ratios. No other
system components will change state during this test.
Code Title Description
P4-0 High Speed Setup: Evaporator fans start in the off condition, current draw is measured,
Evaporator Fans On and then high speed evaporator fans will be turned on. After 10 seconds the
Test current draw is measured again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Pass / Fail Criteria: Test passes if current draw is in the range specified.
P4-1 High Speed Setup: High speed evaporator fans are then turned off. After 2 seconds the
Evaporator Fans Off current draw is measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test Pass / Fail Criteria: Test passes if current draw is in the range specified.

P5 Tests - Air Stream Sensor Tests: Tests the validity of the Air Stream Temperature & Humidity Sensors (HS).
Code Title Description
P5-0 Supply/Return Setup: High Speed Evaporator Fan is turned on and run for eight minutes,
Temperature Probe with all other outputs de-energized.
Test Pass / Fail Criteria: A temperature comparison is made between the return
and supply probes.
NOTE:
If this test fails, “P5-0” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both Probe tests (this
test and the PRIMARY/ SECONDARY) pass, display will read “P5” “PASS.”
P5-1 Primary vs Requirements: For units equipped with secondary supply probe only.
Secondary Supply Pass / Fail Criteria: The temperature difference between Supply
Temperature Test Temperature Sensor (STS) and supply recorder sensor (SRS) probe is
compared.
NOTE:
If this test fails, “P5-1” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both Probe tests (this
and the SUPPLY/RETURN TEST) pass, because of the multiple tests, the
display will read “P 5” “PASS.”
P5-2 Primary vs Requirements: For units equipped with secondary return probe only.
Secondary Return Pass / Fail Criteria: The temperature difference between Return
Temperature Test Temperature Sensor (RTS) and Return Recorder Sensor (RRS) probe is
compared.
NOTES:
1. If this test fails, “P5-2” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both Probe tests (this
test and the SUPPLY/RETURN) pass, because of the multiple tests, the
display will read “P 5,” “PASS.”
2. The results of Pre-trip tests 5-0, 5-1 and 5-2 will be used to activate or clear
control probe alarms.

T-370 4–48
 Code Title Description
P5-10 Humidity Sensor Setup: This is a Pass / Fail / Skip test of the Humidity Sensor (HS)
Controller configuration.
Configuration Pass / Fail Criteria: Test passes if the controller configuration has Humidity
Verification Test Sensor in. Test fails if the controller configuration has Humidity Sensor out
and Humidity Sensor voltage is greater than 0. This test is skipped if the
controller configuration has the Humidity Sensor out and Vout is less than
0.20 Volts.
P5-11 Humidity Sensor Setup: This is a Pass / Fail test of Humidity Sensor (HS) installation, humidity
Installation sensor is present. Test P5-10 must pass before this test is run.
Verification Test Pass / Fail Criteria: Test passes if Humidity Sensor voltage is greater than
0.20.
Test fails if the voltage is less than 0.20 Volts or if the humidity sensor is
configured in and is not present.
P5-12 Humidity Sensor Setup: This is a Pass / Fail test of the Humidity Sensor (HS) range. Test P5-
Range Check Test 11 must pass before this test is run.
Pass / Fail Criteria: Test passes if Humidity Sensor voltage is between 0.33
Volts and 4 Volts. Otherwise the test fails.

P6 Tests - Refrigerant Probes, Variable Frequency Drive, and Refrigeration Valves: Tests the VFD, EVXV,
HPXV, Unloader Solenoid Valve, Economizer Solenoid Valve, and refrigerant pressure/temperature sensors.
Code Title Description
P6-0 Discharge Pass / Fail Criteria: If AL64 (Discharge Temperature Sensor) is activate, the
Thermistor Test test fails. Otherwise the test passes.
P6-1 Suction Thermistor Pass / Fail Criteria: If the Suction Temperature Sensor (CPSS) is both
Test configured ON and is invalid, the test fails. Otherwise the test passes.
P6-2 Discharge Pressure Pass / Fail Criteria: If AL65 (Discharge Pressure Sensor, DPT) is active any
Sensor Test time during the first 45 second period, the test fails. Otherwise, the test
passes.
P6-3 Suction Pressure Pass / Fail Criteria: If AL66 (Suction Pressure Sensor) is active the test fails.
Sensor Test Otherwise the test passes.
P6-4 Flash Tank Pressure Pass / Fail Criteria: If AL68 (Flash Tank Pressure Transducer Alarm), is
Sensor Test active the test fails. Otherwise the test passes.
NOTE:
After P6-4 is complete, the unit will establish an initial operating condition.
P6-5 Unloader Valve Setup: This test is run after P6-6. During this test, 50 seconds after the initial
(USV) Test run condition USV will close while system pressures are checked. After
meeting certain criteria the USV will be opened and system operating
conditions will again be checked to confirm that USV has opened.
P6-6 Variable Frequency Setup: This test is run before P6-5. During this test, the unit will establish an
Drive Test initial operating condition. After 20 seconds at the initial condition compressor
speed will be increased and system operating conditions will be recorded
after which time the compressor speed will be decreased.
Pass / Fail Criteria: Test passes when a pressure change has been
detected.
P6-7 High Pressure Setup: After P6-6 is complete, the unit will establish an initial operating
Expansion Valve condition. After the initial operating condition the controller will slowly adjust
(HPXV) Test HPXV and monitor discharge pressure.
Pass / Fail Criteria: Test will pass provided an increase in discharge
pressure has been detected.

4–49 T-370
 Code Title Description
P6-8 Evaporator Setup: After P6-7 is complete, the unit will establish an initial operating
Expansion Valve condition. After the initial operating condition the controller will slowly adjust
(EEV) Test EEV.
Pass / Fail Criteria: Once pressure difference has been determined, the test
passes.
P6-9 Economizer Setup: Setup: After P6-8 has completed, the unit will establish an initial
Solenoid Valve operating condition. The controller will then energize the Unloader Solenoid
(ESV) Test Valve (USV), followed by the economizer valve ESV. The controller will
monitor system pressures
Pass / Fail Criteria: Test will pass based on the change in pressure.
P6-10 Low Charge Check Pass / Fail Criteria: Test will pass if the unit has adequate charge.
Otherwise, test fails.

NOTICE
P7-0 & P8 are included with “Auto2 & Auto3” only. P9-0 through P10 are included with “Auto2” only.

P7 Tests - High Pressure Tests: Unit is run at full capacity with low condenser fan running to make sure that the
HPS opens and closes properly.
Code Title Description
P7-0 High Pressure When test is running, the right display shows Discharge Pressure if the
Switch Opening sensor is configured and valid, else Discharge Temperature.
Test Setup: The unit will establish an initial operating condition, then will slowly
adjust VFD and HPXV and control system pressure to reach test criteria.
Pre-trip 7 will be skipped if any of the following conditions are met before the
test:
Return Temperature < -17.77°C.
Water Pressure Switch is open (if equipped).
Pass / Fail Criteria: Test passes if HPS opens any time after the compressor
starts.
Test fails if:
HPS fails to open before 900 seconds total test time. Discharge Pressure
greater than 2075 psig. If greater than 2075 psig shutdown compressor, turn
on fans, fail test.
Abort test if:
Evaporator IP alarm.
Compressor IP alarm.
Water Pressure Switch opens (if equipped).
Discharge Temperature exceeds 146.1°C
Both Discharge Pressure and Discharge Temperature go invalid.
Compressor Current exceeds operating parameters.
P7-1 High Pressure Setup: The controller will energize the gas cooler fan, open valves, and stop
Switch Close Test the compressor.
Pass / Fail Criteria: The test passes if the high pressure switch closes within
the 60 seconds.

P8 Tests - Perishable Mode Tests: Pre-trip tests P7-0 and P7-1 must have passed or have been skipped for
these tests to execute.

T-370 4–50
 Code Title Description
P8-0 Perishable Mode Setup: If the control temperature is below 15.56°C, the set-point is changed
Heat Test to 15.56°C, and a 180 minute timer is started. The control will then be placed
in the equivalent of normal heating. If the control temperature is above
15.56°C at the start of the test, then the test proceeds immediately to test 8-
1. While in test 8-0 the right display will show the value of the control
temperature.
Pass / Fail Criteria: The test fails if the timer expires before the control
temperature reaches set-point - 0.3°C. If the test fails, it will not auto-repeat.
There is no pass display for this test. Once the control temperature reaches
set-point, the test proceeds to test 8-1.
P8-1 Perishable Mode Requirements: Control temperature must be at least 15.6°C (60°F).
Pulldown Test Setup: Setpoint is changed to 0°C. The system will attempt to pull down the
control temperature to setpoint using the equivalent of normal perishable
cooling. During this test, the control temperature will be displayed on the right
display.
Pass / Fail Criteria: The test passes if the control temperature goes below
the setpoint before the 180 minute timer expires and CO2 sensor calibration
passes or is skipped. Otherwise, the test fails.
P8-2 Perishable Mode Requirements: Test P8-1 must pass for this test to execute. This test is
Maintain skipped if the DataCORDER is not configured or not available.
Temperature Test Setup: 15-minute timer is started. The unit will be required to minimize control
temperature error (supply temp minus setpoint) until timer expires. Control
temperature is sampled at least once each minute starting at the beginning of
P8-2.
Pass / Fail Criteria: If the average recorded temperature is within +/- 1.0°C
(1.8°F) of setpoint, the test passes. If the average temperature is outside of
the tolerance range or if the DataCORDER supply temperature probe is
invalid, the test fails and the control probe temperature will be recorded as -
50.0°C. P8-2 will auto-repeat by starting P8-0 over.

P9 Tests - DTT Close and Open Test: The DTT in this control is not a physical device, with actual metallic con-
tacts, it is a software function that acts similar to a thermostat. Using various temperature inputs, the DTT function
determines whether a thermostat mounted on the Evaporator Coil would have OPEN or CLOSED contacts. Primar-
ily, the DTT function operates based on the temperature reading from the Defrost Termination Sensor.
Code Title Description
P9-0 DTT Closed and Setup: System will run full cool for 30 minutes max while the DTT probe
Open Test temperature is above 10°C. (opening threshold), allowing DTT to become
considered closed. This step may not have to be executed. Once DTT is
considered closed, system simulates defrost by running the heaters for up to
2 hours, or until DTT is considered open (25.6°C/18°C depending on
configuration & defrost options). Successful opening of DTT causes the
Defrost Interval Timer to be reset. Condenser Pressure Control logic should
be used for this test if the controller is configured for it.
Pass / Fail Criteria: The test fails if: the DTT is not considered closed after
the 30 minutes of full cooling, HTT opens when DTT is considered closed or
if return air temperature rises above 49°C (120°F). The test passes if the DTT
is considered open within the 2 hour heat cycle time limit.

-----

4–51 T-370
P10 Tests - Frozen Mode Tests:
Code Title Description
P10-0 Frozen Mode Heat Setup: If the container temperature is below 7.2°C, the setpoint is changed
Test to 7.2°C., and a 180 Minute timer is started. The control will then be placed in
the equivalent of normal heating. If the container temperature is above 7.2C.
at the start of the test, then the test proceeds immediately to test 10-1. During
this test, the control temperature will be shown on the right display.
Pass / Fail Criteria: The test fails if the 180 Minute timer expires before the
control temperature reaches setpoint - 0.3°C. If the test fails, it will not auto-
repeat. There is no pass display for this test. Once the control temperature
reaches setpoint, the test proceeds to test 10-1.
P10-1 Frozen Mode Requirements: Control temperature must be at least 7.2°C (45°F)
Pulldown Test Setup: The setpoint is changed to -17.8°C. The system will then attempt to
pull down the control temperature to setpoint using normal frozen mode
cooling. During this test, the control temperature will be shown on the right
display.
Pass / Fail Criteria: The test passes if the control temperature reaches
setpoint minus 0.3°C before the 180 minute timer expires. Otherwise, the test
fails. Upon failure and when initiated by an automatic Pre-trip sequence, P10-
1 will auto-repeat once by starting P10-0 over again.
P10-2 Frozen Mode Requirements: Test P10-1 must pass for this test to execute.
Maintain Setup: Same as test 8-2 except control temperature is return probe.
Temperature Test
Pass / Fail Criteria: The average error must be +/-1.6°C. If the
DataCORDER supply temperature probe is invalid, the test fails and the
control probe temperature will be recorded as -50°C. Upon failure and when
initiated by an automatic Pre-trip sequence, P10-2 will auto-repeat by starting
P10-0 over again.

-----

Table 4–9 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments

NOTE:
Inapplicable Functions display “-----”
To Access: Press the ALT.MODE key then CODE SELECT key
Code Title Description
dC1 Recorder Supply Current reading of the supply recorder sensor.
Temperature
dC2 Recorder Return Current reading of the return recorder sensor.
Temperature
dC3-5 USDA 1,2,3 Current readings of the three USDA probes.
Temperatures
dC6-13 Network Data Current values of the network data points, as configured. Data point 1 (code
Points 1-8 6) is generally the Humidity Sensor (HS) and its value is obtained from the
controller once every minute.
dC14 Cargo Probe 4 Current reading of the cargo probe #4.
Temperature
dC15-19 Future Expansion These codes are for future expansion, and are not in use at this time.
dC20-24 Temperature Current calibration offset values for each of the five probes: supply, return,
Sensors 1-5 USDA #1, #2, and #3. These values are entered via the interrogation
Calibration program.
dC25 Future Expansion This code is for future expansion, and is not in use at this time.

T-370 4–52
 Table 4–9 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments
NOTE:
Inapplicable Functions display “-----”
To Access: Press the ALT.MODE key then CODE SELECT key
Code Title Description
dC26,27 S/N, Left 4, Right 4 The DataCORDER serial number consists of eight characters. Function code
dC26 contains the first four characters. Function code dC27 contains the last
four characters. (This serial number is the same as the controller serial
number.)
dC28 Minimum Days Left An approximation of the number of logging days remaining until the
DataCORDER starts to overwrite the existing data.
dC29 Days Stored Number of days of data that are currently stored in the DataCORDER.
dC30 Date of Last Trip The date when a Trip Start was initiated by the user. In addition, if the system
start goes without power for seven continuous days or longer, a trip start will
automatically be generated on the next AC power up. Press and hold
“ENTER” key for five seconds to initiate a “Trip Start.”
dC31 Battery Test Shows the current status of the optional battery pack.
PASS: Battery pack is fully charged.
FAIL: Battery pack voltage is low.
dC32 Time: Hour, Minute Current time on the real time clock (RTC) in the DataCORDER.
dC33 Date: Month, Day Current date (month and day) on the RTC in the DataCORDER.
dC34 Date: Year Current year on the RTC in the DataCORDER.
dC35 Cargo Probe 4 Current calibration value for the Cargo Probe. This value is an input via the
Calibration interrogation program.

Table 4–10 DataCORDER Pre-Trip Result Records

Test Title Data
P1-0 Heater On Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C.
P1-1 Heater Off Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C.
P2-0 Gas Cooler Fan On Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Water Pressure Switch (WPS) - Open /
Closed.
Change in currents for Phase A, B and C.
P2-1 Gas Cooler Fan Off Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C.
P3-0 Low Speed Evaporator Fan On Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C.
P3-1 Low Speed Evaporator Fan Off Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C.
P4-0 High Speed Evaporator Fan On Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C.
P4-1 High Speed Evaporator Fan Off Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C.
P5-0 Supply / Return Probe Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, RTS, SRS and RRS.
P5-1 Secondary Supply Probe (SRS) Pass / Fail / Skip.
Test
P5-2 Secondary Return Probe (RRS) Pass / Fail / Skip.
Test
P5-10 Humidity Sensor Controller Pass / Fail / Skip.
Configuration
P5-11 Humidity Sensor Installation Pass / Fail / Skip.

4–53 T-370
 Table 4–10 DataCORDER Pre-Trip Result Records
Test Title Data
P5-12 Humidity Sensor Range Pass / Fail / Skip.
P6-0 Discharge Thermistor Test Pass / Fail / Skip.
P6-1 Suction Thermistor Test Pass / Fail / Skip.
P6-2 Discharge Pressure Sensor Test Pass / Fail / Skip.
P6-3 Suction Pressure Sensor Test Pass / Fail / Skip.
P6-4 Flash Tank Pressure Sensor Test Pass / Fail / Skip.
P6-5 USV Test Pass / Fail / Skip.
P6-6 VFD Test Pass / Fail / Skip.
P6-7 HPXV Test Pass / Fail / Skip.
P6-8 EEV Test Pass / Fail / Skip.
P6-9 ESV Test Pass / Fail / Skip.
P6-10 Low Charge Check Pass / Fail / Skip.
P7-0 High Pressure Switch Open Pass / Fail / Skip.
P7-1 High Pressure Switch Close Pass / Fail / Skip.
P8-0 Perishable Mode Heat Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, time it takes to heat to 16°C (60°F).
P8-1 Perishable Mode Pulldown Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, time it takes to pull down to 0°C
(32°F).
P8-2 Perishable Mode Maintain Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER supply
temperature (SRS) over last recording interval.
P9-0 DTT Open / Close Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, DTS reading at end of test, line voltage,
line frequency, time in defrost.
P10-0 Frozen Mode Heat Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, time unit is in heat.
P10-1 Frozen Mode Pulldown Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, time to pull down unit to -17.8°C
(0°F).
P10-2 Frozen Mode Maintain Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER return
temperature (RRS) over last recording interval.

T-370 4–54
 SECTION 5
OPERATION
5.1 Introduction

! WARNING
Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and gas cooler fans. The unit may cycle the
fans and compressor unexpectedly as control requirements dictate.

1. Check inside for the following:

a. Check channels or “T” bar floor for cleanliness. Channels must be free of debris for proper air circulation.
b. Check container panels, insulation and door seals for damage. Effect permanent or temporary repairs.
c. Visually check evaporator fan motor mounting bolts for proper securement (see Section 7.13).
d. Check for visible corrosion on the evaporator stator and fan deck (see Section 7.14).
e. Check for dirt or grease on evaporator fans or fan deck and clean if necessary.
f. Check evaporator coil for cleanliness or obstructions. Wash with fresh water.
g. Check defrost drain pans and drain lines for obstructions and clear if necessary. Wash with fresh water.
h. Check panels on refrigeration unit for loose bolts and condition of panels. Make sure TIR devices are in
place on access panels.
2. Check gas cooler coil for cleanliness. Wash with fresh water.
3. Open control box door. Check for loose electrical connections or hardware.

5.2 Connect Power

! WARNING
Do not attempt to remove power plug(s) before turning OFF Start-Stop switch (ST), unit circuit
breaker(s) and external power source.

! WARNING
Make sure the power plugs are clean and dry before connecting to power receptacle.

5.2.1 Connection To 380/460 VAC Power

1. Make sure Start-Stop switch (ST), on control panel) and circuit breaker (CB-1, in the control box) are in posi-
tion “0” (OFF).
2. Plug the 460 VAC (yellow) cable into a de-energized 380/460 VAC, 3-phase power source. Energize the
power source. Place circuit breaker (CB-1) in position “I” (ON). Close and secure control box door.

5.3 Adjust Fresh Air Makeup Vent

The purpose of the fresh air makeup vent is to provide ventilation for commodities that require fresh air circulation.
The vent must be closed when transporting frozen foods.
Air exchange depends on static pressure differential, which will vary depending on the container and how the con-
tainer is loaded.
Units may be equipped with a Vent Position Sensor (VPS). The VPS determines the position of the fresh air vent
and sends data to the controller display.

5–1 T-370
5.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent
Two slots and a stop are designed into the Upper Fresh Air disc for air flow adjustments. The first slot allows for a 0
to 30% air flow; the second slot allows for a 30 to 100% air flow. To adjust the percentage of air flow, loosen the
wing nut and rotate the disc until the desired percentage of air flow matches with the arrow. Tighten the wing nut.
To clear the gap between the slots, loosen the wing nut until the disc clears the stop.
Figure 5.1 gives air exchange values for an empty container. Higher values can be expected for a fully loaded con-
tainer.

Figure 5.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Flow Chart

AIR FLOW AIR FLOW

(CMH) (CMH) 60HZ
50HZ
250 300

TBAR TBAR
250 1 1/2”
200 1 1/2”

TBAR TBAR
200 2 5/8”
2 5/8”
150 TBAR 3” TBAR 3”

150

100
100

50
50

0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PERCENT OPEN PERCENT OPEN

5.3.2 Vent Position Sensor

The VPS allows the user to determine the position of the fresh air vent via Function Code Cd45. This function code
is accessible via the CODE SELECT key.
The vent position will display for 30 seconds whenever motion corresponding to 5 CMH (3 CFM) or greater is
detected.
It will scroll in intervals of 5 CMH (3 CFM). Scrolling to Function Code 45 will display the Fresh Air Vent Position.
The vent position will be recorded in the DataCORDER whenever the unit is running under AC power and any of
the following:
Trip start
On every power cycle
Midnight
Manual changes greater than 5 CMH (3 CFM)
Vent remains in the new position for at least 4 minutes

NOTICE
The user has four minutes to make necessary adjustments to the vent setting. This time calcu-
lation begins on the initial movement of the sensor. The vent can be moved to any position
within the four minutes. On completion of the first four minutes, the vent is required to remain
stable for the next four minutes. If vent position changes are detected during the four minute
stability period, an alarm will be generated. This provides the user with the ability to change
the vent setting without generating multiple events in the DataCORDER.

T-370 5–2
Operational Parameters
FLO indicates the opening to which the slide will move based on the stored value in CMH (in increments of 5) or
CFM depending on the selection of Cd46 (Airflow display units), Cd28 (Metric/Imperial) or the pressing of the deg
C/F key. CFM is displayed as CF, CMH is displayed as CM.
tIM is the time delay prior to the door opening. The time range is from 1 to 72 hrs in 1 hr increments.
CO2LM is the maximum level of carbon dioxide that is allowed for the cargo. The range is from 0% to 19% in 1%
increments, the default setting is 10.
O2LM is the minimum level of O2 that is allowed for the cargo. The range is from 2% to 20% in 1% increments, the
default setting is 10.
Rtn is an offset value used to expand the return air temperature value in order to compensate for fresh air entering
the container. The allowable range is 0.6°C - 2.8°C or 1.0°F - 5.0°F in 0.1 degree increments, default setting is
2.8°C (5°F).

5.4 Connect Water Cooled Condenser

The water-cooled condenser is used when cooling water is available and heating the surrounding air is objectionable,
such as in a ship’s hold. If water cooled operation is desired, connect in accordance with the following procedure:
1. Connect the water supply line to the inlet/outlet couplings on the unit.
2. Maintain a flow rate of 15 to 30 liters per minute (4 to 8 gallons per minute). The water pressure switch will
open to de-energize the gas cooler fan relay. The gas cooler fan motor will stop and will remain stopped until
the water pressure switch closes.
3. To shift to air-cooled condenser operation, disconnect the water supply and the discharge line to the water-
cooled condenser. The refrigeration unit will shift to air-cooled condenser operation when the water pressure
switch closes.

5.5 Connect Remote Monitoring Receptacle

If remote monitoring is required, connect remote monitor plug at unit receptacle. When the remote monitor plug is
connected to the remote monitoring receptacle, the following remote circuits are energized:

Circuit Function
Sockets B to A Energizes remote cool light
Sockets C to A Energizes remote defrost light
Sockets D to A Energizes remote in-range light

! WARNING
Make sure that the unit circuit breaker CB-1 and the Start-Stop switch (ST) are in the “O” (OFF)
position before connecting to any electrical power source.

5.5.1 Starting the Unit

1. With power properly applied and the fresh air vent position set (if required) place the Start-Stop switch (ST)
to “I” (ON).

NOTICE
The electronic phase detection system will check for proper phase rotation within the first 5
seconds. If rotation is not correct, the phase will be reversed.
2. The Controller Function Codes for the container ID (Cd40), software version (Cd18) and unit model number
(Cd20) will be displayed in sequence.
3. Continue with Start Up Inspection, Section 5.6.

5.5.2 Stopping the Unit

To stop the unit, place the Start-Stop switch (ST) in position “0” (OFF).

5–3 T-370
5.6 Start-Up Inspections
5.6.1 Physical Inspection
Check rotation of gas cooler and evaporator fans.

5.6.2 Check Controller Function Codes

Check, and if required, reset controller function codes (Cd27 through Cd39) in accordance with desired operating
parameters. See Table 4–7.

5.6.3 DataCORDER Inspection

1. Check and, if required, set the DataCORDER Configuration in accordance with desired recording parame-
ter. See Table 4.7.3.
2. Enter a “Trip Start.” To enter a “Trip Start,” do the following:
a. Press the ALT MODE key. When the left display shows, dC, Press the ENTER key.
b. Scroll to Code dC30.
c. Press and hold the ENTER key for five seconds.
d. The “Trip Start” event will be entered in the DataCORDER.

5.6.4 Complete Inspection

Allow unit to run for five minutes to stabilize conditions and perform a pre-trip diagnosis in accordance with the fol-
lowing paragraph.

5.7 Pre-Trip Diagnosis

! CAUTION
Pre-trip diagnostics should not be performed with critical temperature cargoes in the container.

! CAUTION
When the PRE-TRIP key is pressed, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode will be deacti-
vated. At the completion of Pre-Trip activity, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode must
be reactivated.

Pre-trip diagnosis provides automatic testing of the unit components using internal measurements and comparison
logic. The program will provide a “PASS” or “FAIL” display to indicate test results.
The testing begins with access to a Pre-trip selection menu. The user may have the option of selecting one of two
automatic tests. These tests will automatically perform a series of individual Pre-trip tests. The user may also scroll
down to select any of the individual tests. When only the short sequence is configured, it will appear as “AUtO” in the
display. Otherwise “AUtO1” will indicate the short sequence and “AUtO2” will indicate the long sequence. The test
short sequence will run tests P0 through P6. The long test sequence will run tests P0 through P10.
A detailed description of the Pre-trip test codes is listed in Section 4.12. If no selection is made, the Pre-trip menu
selection process will terminate automatically. However, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated man-
ually if required.
Scrolling down to the “r SLts” code and pressing the ENTER key will allow the user to scroll through the results of
the last Pre-trip testing run. If no Pre-test has been run (or an individual test has not been run) since the unit was
powered up, “−−−−” will be displayed.

T-370 5–4
Prior to Starting a Trip Test verify the following:
• Voltage (Cd 07) is within tolerance and unit amperage draw (Cd 04, Cd 05, Cd 06) are within expected limits.
Otherwise, tests may fail incorrectly.
• All alarms are rectified and cleared.

5.7.1 Starting a Pre-Trip

1. Press the PRE-TRIP key to access the Pre-trip test selection menu. “SELCt PrtrP” will be displayed.

NOTE
While making a selection, failure to press either an Arrow key or ENTER for 5 seconds will return the
system to its default display, and normal operating mode.

2. To Run an Automatic Test: Scroll through the selections by pressing the Up or Down Arrow keys to display
AUtO, AUtO 1, AUtO 2 or AUtO 3 as desired, then press the ENTER key.
• The unit will execute the series of tests without any need for direct user interface. These tests vary in
length, depending on the component under test.
• While tests are running, “P#-#” will appear on the left display; the #’s indicate the test number and sub-
test. The right display will show a countdown time in minutes and seconds, indicating the amount of time
remaining in the test.

! CAUTION
When a failure occurs during automatic testing, the unit will suspend operation awaiting oper-
ator intervention.

! CAUTION
When Pre-trip test Auto2 runs to completion without being interrupted, the unit will terminate
Pre-trip and display “Auto2 end”. The unit will suspend operation until the user presses the
ENTER key.

When Pre-trip test Auto1 runs to completion without a failure, the unit will exit the pre-trip mode
and return to normal control operation. However, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reacti-
vated manually if required.

3. When an automatic test fails, it will be repeated once. A repeated test failure will cause “FAIL” to be shown
on the right display, with the corresponding test number to the left. The user may then press the Down Arrow
key to repeat the test, the Up Arrow key to skip to the next test or the PRE-TRIP key to terminate testing.
The unit will wait indefinitely or until the user manually enters a command.
4. To Run an Individual Test: Scroll through the selections by pressing the Up or Down Arrow keys to display
an individual test code. Press the ENTER key when the desired test code is displayed.
• Individually selected tests, other than the LED / Display test, will perform the operations necessary to ver-
ify the operation of the component. At the conclusion, “PASS” or “FAIL” will be displayed. This message
will remain displayed for up to three minutes, during which time a user may select another test. If the
three minute time period expires, the unit will terminate Pre-trip and return to control mode operation.
• While the tests are being executed, the user may terminate the Pre-trip diagnostics by pressing and hold-
ing the PRE-TRIP key. The unit will then resume normal operation. If the user decides to terminate a test
but remain at the test selection menu, the user may press the Up Arrow key. When this is done, all test
outputs will be de-energized and the test selection menu will be displayed.
• Throughout the duration of any Pre-trip test (except the P-7 high pressure switch tests), the current and
pressure limiting processes are active. The current limiting process only is active for P-7.

5–5 T-370
5.7.2 Displaying Pre-Trip Results
1. Press the PRE-TRIP key to access the Pre-trip test selection menu. “SELCt PrtrP” will be displayed.

2. Press the Arrow keys until “P rSLts” (Pre-trip results) is displayed.

NOTE
While making a selection, failure to press either an Arrow key or ENTER for 5 seconds will return the
system to its default display, and normal operating mode.

3. Press the ENTER key. The results for all Pre-trip sub tests are available from this menu (i.e., 1-0, 1-1, etc).
The results will be displayed as “PASS” or “FAIL” for all the tests run to completion since power up. If a test
has not been run since power up, “-----” will be displayed.
Once all Pre-test activity is completed, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated manually if
required.

5.8 Observe Unit Operation

5.8.1 Probe Diagnostic Logic
For units configured with four temperature probes, which include the supply and return temperature probes and the
supply and return DataCORDER probes, the controller continuously performs probe diagnosis testing that com-
pares the four probes. If the diagnosis result indicates a problem exists, the controller will perform a probe check to
identify which probe or probes are in error.

a. Probe Diagnostic Logic:

In the perishable mode of operation, both pairs of supply and return probes are monitored for probe dis-
agreement. Probe disagreement is considered a difference of 0.5°C (0.9°F) or greater between the supply
air sensors and/or a difference of 2.0°C (3.6°F) between the return air sensors. Probe disagreement found in
either pair can trigger a defrost probe check.
In the frozen mode of operation, only the controlling probes are considered. Disagreement of the controlling
probes can trigger a defrost probe check, which will occur when the difference between the sensors are
greater than 2.0°C (3.6°F). Normally, the controlling probes are the return probes but if both return probes
are invalidated, the supply probes are used for control purposes. Probe disagreement of the non-controlling
probe pair will not trigger a defrost probe check.
If the supply probes agree and return probes agree, all supply and return sensors are valid and the unit
returns to normal control.
If supply probes disagree and the return probes agree, then invalidate the worst supply probe. If the probe
check is run as part of Pre-trip P-5, an alarm will be triggered for the invalidated probe. If it is a run time defrost
probe check, the invalidated probe will be passed over and no alarm will be triggered. However, if the best sup-
ply probe is greater than 1.2°C (2.2°F) difference with respect to its return probes, the best supply probe is also
invalidated. If unit is in perishable operation, a probe alarm will be triggered for both supply probes.
If the supply probes agree and return probes disagree, invalidate the worst return probe. If the probe check is
being run as part of Pre-trip P-5, an alarm will be triggered for the invalidated probe. If it is a run time defrost
probe check, the invalidated probe will be passed over and no alarm will be necessary. If the best return probe
is greater than 1.2°C (2.2°F) difference with respect to its supply probes, then the best return probe is also
invalidated. If unit is in perishable operation, a probe alarm will be triggered for both return probes.

b. Probe Check Procedure:

A probe check diagnostic procedure is executed during Pre-trip P-5. A defrost cycle probe check may be
accomplished at the end of defrost by energizing the evaporator motors for eight minutes at the end of the
normal defrost. The defrost light will remain on during this period. If supply probes are within limits and return
probes are within limits, the unit will return to normal control.

T-370 5–6
 SECTION 6
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1 Unit Will Not Start Or Starts Then Stops

Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
No power to unit External power source OFF Turn On
Start-Stop switch OFF or defective Check
Circuit breaker OFF or tripped Check
Loss of control power Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check
Control transformer defective Check
Fuse (F3A / F3B) blown Check
Start-Stop switch OFF or defective Check
Component(s) not operating Evaporator fan motor internal protector open Section 7.13
Gas Cooler fan motor internal protector open Section 7.9
Compressor internal protector open Section 7.3
High Pressure Switch (HPS) open Section 5.8
Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT) open Replace
Current sensor malfunction Replace

6.2 Unit Operates Long Or Continuously In Cooling

Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
Container Hot load Normal
Box insulation defective or air leak Repair
Refrigeration system Refrigerant shortage Section 7.2.6
Evaporator coil covered with ice Section 6.6
Evaporator coil plugged with debris Section 7.11
Evaporator coil has air bypass around it Check
Controller set too low Reset
Coil dirty Section 7.8
Current limit (Cd32) set to wrong value Section 4.4.3
Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) malfunction Section 7.17
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) Replace

6–1 T-370
6.3 Unit Runs But Has Insufficient Cooling
Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
Refrigeration system Pressures abnormal Section 6.7
Temperatures abnormal Section 6.13
Currents abnormal Section 6.14
Controller malfunction Section 6.9
Evaporator fan or motor defective Section 7.13
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) Replace

6.4 Unit Will Not Heat Or Has Insufficient Heating

Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
No operation of any kind Start-Stop switch OFF or defective Check
Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check
External power source OFF ON
No control power Circuit breaker or fuse defective Replace
Control Transformer defective Replace
Evaporator fan internal motor protector open Section 7.13
Heat relay defective Check
Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT) open Section 7.11
Unit will not heat or has Heater(s) defective Section 7.11
insufficient heat
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Evaporator fan motor(s) defective Section 7.11 / Section 7.13
Evaporator fan motor contactor defective Replace
Controller malfunction Section 6.9
Wiring defective Replace
Terminal connections loose Tighten
Line voltage low Section 3.4

6.5 Unit Will Not Terminate Heating

Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
Unit fails to stop heating Controller improperly set Reset
Controller malfunction Section 6.9
Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT) remains Section 7.11
closed along with the heat relay

T-370 6–2
6.6 Unit Will Not Defrost Properly
Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
Will not initiate defrost Defrost timer malfunction (Cd27) Table 4–7
automatically
Terminal connections loose Tighten
Wiring defective Replace
Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) defective or Replace
Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT) open
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Will not initiate defrost Manual defrost switch defective Replace
manually
Keypad defective Replace
Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) open Replace
Initiates but relay DR drops out Low line voltage Section 3.4
Initiates but does not defrost Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Heater(s) burned out Section 7.11

6.7 Abnormal Pressures

Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
High discharge pressure Gas Cooler coil dirty Section 7.8
Gas Cooler fan rotating backwards Section 7.9
Gas Cooler fan inoperative Section 7.9
Refrigerant overcharge or non-condensibles Section 7.2.6
High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV) control Replace
malfunction
Low suction pressure Software incorrect and/or controller configuration Check
incorrect
Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT) failed Replace
Evaporator air flow not present or restricted Section 7.11
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) control Replace
malfunction

6.8 Abnormal Noise Or Vibrations

Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
Compressor Mounting bolts loose Tighten / Replace
Liquid slugging Section 7.15
Gas Cooler or Evaporator Fan Bent, loose or striking venturi Check
Motor bearings worn Section 7.9 / Section 7.13
Motor shaft bent Section 7.9 / Section 7.13

6–3 T-370
6.9 Microprocessor Malfunction
Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
Will not control Software incorrect and/or controller Check
configuration incorrect
Sensor defective Section 7.22
Wiring defective Check
Refrigerant charge low Section 7.2.6

6.10 No Evaporator Air Flow Or Restricted Air Flow

Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
Evaporator coil blocked Coil has frost Section 6.6
Coil dirty Section 7.11
No or partial evaporator air flow Evaporator fan motor internal protector open Section 7.13
Evaporator fan motor(s) defective Section 7.13
Evaporator fan(s) loose or defective Section 7.13
Evaporator fan contactor defective Replace

6.11 Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) Malfunction

Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
Low suction pressure Software incorrect and/or controller Check
configuration incorrect.
Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT) failed Replace
Evaporator air flow not present or restricted Section 7.11
Evaporator coil has excessive frost Section 6.6
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) control Section 7.15
malfunction
Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS) loose Replace
or insufficiently clamped
High suction pressure with low Valve contains foreign material Section 6.11
superheat
Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT) failed Replace
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) control Replace
malfunction
Liquid slugging in compressor Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT) failed Replace
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) failed Replace

T-370 6–4
6.12 High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV) Malfunction
Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
High discharge pressure High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV) coil not Section 7.15.2
seated properly, loose, or not fully engaged.
Software incorrect or controller configuration Check
incorrect
Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) failed Replace
Filter drier restriction Section 7.10
Gas Cooler Temperature Sensor (GCTS) loose or Check
insufficiently clamped
Gas cooler coil dirty Section 7.8
Gas cooler fan rotating backwards Section 7.9
Gas cooler fan inoperative Section 7.9
HPXV control malfunction Replace
HPXV failed Replace

6.13 Abnormal Temperatures

Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
High discharge temperature Gas cooler coil dirty Section 7.8
Gas cooler fan rotating backwards Section 7.9
Gas cooler fan inoperative Section 7.9
Refrigerant overcharge or non-condensibles Section 7.2.6
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) control Replace
malfunction
Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT) failed Replace
Discharge Temperature Sensor drifting high Replace
Sensor loose or insufficiently clamped Replace
Electronic Solenoid Valve (ESV) coil not fully Section 7.17.2
engaged
ESV or ESV coil malfunction Replace

6.14 Abnormal Currents

Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
Unit reads abnormal currents Current sensor wiring Check
Component is defective Check current draw /
Replace as needed.

6.15 Fuse F1 or F2 Blown

Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
Fuse F1 or F2 Blown Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) drive module Check EEV drive module by
wires were grounded. unplugging it, replacing the
fuse(s) and turning the unit
back on.

6–5 T-370
 SECTION 7
SERVICE

! CAUTION
Never use air or gases containing oxygen for leak testing or operating refrigerant compres-
sors. Pressurized mixtures of air or gases containing oxygen can lead to explosion.

7.1 Annual Maintenance Procedures

NOTE
Annual maintenance procedures for NaturaLINE units 69NT40-601 can be found in the 62-12119
Annual Inspection manual, located in the Literature section of the Container Refrigeration website. To
find the manual from the Literature section, click on Container Units > NaturaLINE > Operation.

7.2 Service Gauge Set

The service gauge set (part # 07-00582-00) is used to determine system operating pressure, add refrigerant charge,
and to equalize or evacuate the system. See Figure 7.1.

Figure 7.1 Service Gauge Set

1 2

3 4

1) Suction Gauge (low side) 5) Suction Coupling (low side)

2) Discharge Gauge (high side) 6) Discharge Coupling (high side)
3) Suction Hand Valve (low side) 7) Utility hoses:
4) Discharge Hand Valve (high side) - yellow 3/8” (faster evacuation)
- black 1/4”
-----

7–1 T-370
 ! DANGER
Only use manifold gauge sets designed and manufactured for R-744 (CO2) on these units.

7.2.1 Service Connections

There are two service connections on the NaturaLINE unit. See Section 3.1.4 for component locations.
• For PIDs lower than NT5010, the connections are service fittings. The suction (low side) service fitting is
located on the bell housing of the compressor, the discharge (high side) service fitting is located under the
Filter Drier.
• For PIDs NT5010 and higher, the connections are service valves. The suction (low side) service valve is
mounted on a bracket above the compressor, the discharge (high side) service valve is located under the
Filter Drier.

NOTE
To completely open the system the Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV), Unloader Solenoid Valve
(USV), and High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV) must be opened. See Section 7.2.4 for
procedure.

7.2.2 Connecting Service Gauges

Procedure for Units with Service Fitting:

1. Verify that the discharge and suction hand valves on the gauge set are fully closed by turning the knobs
clockwise.
2. Before starting to attach the gauge set, check that the coupling connectors are clean and that both O-ring
seals are correctly seated into their grooves at the bottom of the connector.
3. Remove the suction service connection access cap.
4. Connect the blue field service coupling (low side) to the suction service fitting. Check that the coupling is
locked into place by lightly pulling back on it.
5. Turn the blue coupling knob clockwise to read (low side) system pressure on the gauge.
6. Remove the discharge service fitting access cap.
7. Connect the red field service coupling (high side) to the discharge service fitting. Check that the coupling is
locked into place by lightly pulling back on it.
8. Turn the red coupling knob clockwise to read (high side) system pressure on the gauge.
9. Perform any required maintenance.
10. If any component changes are required, the system must first be evacuated. See Section 7.2.4.

Procedure for Units with Service Valves:

1. Verify that the discharge and suction hand valves on the gauge set are fully closed by turning the knobs
clockwise.
2. Remove the suction service valve stem cap and check that the valve is backseated.
3. Remove the access valve cap.
4. Connect the blue hose (low side) to the access valve.
5. Slightly mid-seat the suction service valve to read (low side) system pressure on the gauge.
6. Remove the discharge service valve stem cap and check that the valve is backseated.
7. Remove the access valve cap.
8. Connect the red hose (high side) to the access valve.
9. Slightly mid-seat the discharge service valve to read (high side) system pressure on the gauge.
10. Perform any required maintenance.
11. If any component changes are required, the system must first be evacuated. See Section 7.2.4.

T-370 7–2
7.2.3 Removing Service Gauges

Procedure for Units with Service Fittings:

1. If the unit is running, turn it off by moving the Start-Stop switch (ST) to the OFF position.
2. Turn the low side field service coupling knob counterclockwise to close the system off to the gauges.
3. Turn the high side field service coupling knobs counterclockwise to close the system off to the gauges. If the
high side coupling is closed first, then the contents of the high side hose can be dumped into the low side
until the pressures equalize. After that, the low side can be closed from the system.

NOTE
As the coupling knobs of the connector valves are being closed, a small pocket of CO2 refrigerant is
isolated inside the connector which makes it difficult to remove. On the last turn of the valve, a vent
opens which releases this trapped refrigerant.
4. With both service couplings closed, connect a hose to the center port of the manifold gauge set.
5. Make sure the open end of the hose is pointed in a safe direction, and slowly open the manifold gauge set
high and low side hand valves to allow the hose pressure to be released.

Procedure for Units with Service Valves:

1. While the compressor is still ON, backseat the discharge (high side) service valve.
2. Midseat both hand valves on the manifold gauge set and allow the pressure in the manifold gauge set to
drawn down to low side pressure. This returns any liquid that may be in the high side hose to the system.
3. Backseat the suction (low side) service valve.
4. Backseat both field service couplings and frontseat both manifold hand valves.
5. Remove hoses / couplings from the access valves.
6. Install both service valve stem caps and service port caps (finger-tight only).

7.2.4 Manually Opening Solenoid Valves and High Pressure Expansion Valve
During system evacuation and refrigerant charging, both solenoid valves (ESV, USV) and the High Pressure
Expansion Valve (HPXV) must be open. This ensures the removal of pockets of refrigerant throughout the system,
and allows a complete system evacuation and dehydration. All valves will be reset upon system start up.
For location of the ESV, USV, and HPXV, see Section 3.1.4.

Opening the Economizer Solenoid Valve / Unloader Solenoid Valve

1. Obtain a magnet tool (Carrier Transicold part # 07-00512-00) to assist in this procedure.
2. Remove the coil from the valve body.
3. Place the magnet over the valve stem, an audible click will be heard when the valve opens.

Opening the High Pressure Expansion Valve

1. Obtain a magnet tool (Carrier Transicold part # 14-00396-20) to assist in this procedure.
2. Remove the power head from the expansion valve body.
3. Place the magnet tool over the valve body and rotate the tool counter-clockwise. When the tool begins to
chatter during rotation, it means that the valve is fully open.
4. After the valve has been opened, replace the power head. Make sure the power head is sitting on the stem
correctly, the dimples on the stem need to be engaged.

7.2.5 Removing Refrigerant Charge

! CAUTION
Opening the Manifold Gauge Valve wide open quickly can cause excessive noise and possible
loss of the system oil charge.

7–3 T-370
To service any component that is part of the pressurized system, it is required to first remove the refrigerant charge.
To completely open the system the Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV), Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV), and High
Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV) must be opened. See Section 7.2.4.
1. Connect the service gauge, by following the procedure for Connecting Service Gauges. See Section 7.2.2.
The gauge will show the system pressure.
2. Once the manifold gauge set is properly connected and open to the system, connect the utility hose to the
center port of the manifold gauge set if not already connected.
3. Secure the utility hose and point in a safe direction.
4. Slowly open the low side and high side of the gauge set to release the refrigerant through the utility hose.
5. After all of the R-744 refrigerant charge has been released from the system and the gauges read 0 psi,
close the manifold gauge set hand valves.

7.2.6 Refrigerant Leak (Tightness) Test

! WARNING
Never use air or gases containing oxygen for leak testing or operating refrigerant compressors.
Pressurized mixtures of air or gases containing oxygen can lead to explosion.

NOTICE
Use only R-744 refrigerant to pressurize the system. Any other gas or vapor will contaminate
the system, and require additional purging and evacuation of the system.
1. If the system is without refrigerant, charge the system with R-744 to full charge on the nameplate. See
Section 7.2.8 for adding refrigerant.
2. Leak-check connections using an R-744 electronic leak detector (part # 07-00529-00). If AR-GLO dye has
been added to the system, a UV torch can also be used to check for signs of leaks.
3. After identifying the leak location, remove the refrigerant charge. See Section 7.2.5.
4. Repair any leaks that were found.
5. Evacuate and dehydrate the unit. See Section 7.2.7. If the unit fails to pull down or maintain a vacuum,
inspect the repair again.
6. Charge the unit. See Section 7.2.8.
7. After the repair is made to the unit (threaded joint or brazed), the joint MUST be leak tested using the R-744
electronic leak tester.

7.2.7 Evacuation and Dehydration

The presence of moisture is detrimental to a refrigeration system can have many undesirable effects. The most
common are copper plating, acid sludge formation, “freezing-up” of metering devices by free water, and formation of
acids resulting in metal corrosion.
To completely open the system the Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV), Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV), and High
Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV) must be opened. See Section 7.2.4.
1. Evacuate and dehydrate only after a refrigerant leak check has been performed and all leaks have been
repaired.
2. Essential tools to properly evacuate and dehydrate the system include high side and low side manifold
gauges, a vacuum pump (part # 07-00176-11) and an electronic vacuum gauge. Vacuum pump should be 8
cfm volume displacement (14 m/hr). If using the gauge set with a 3/8” yellow utility hose, it is faster to use
the 3/8” hose if the pump is equipped with a 3/8” connection.
3. If possible, keep the ambient temperature above 15.6°C (60°F) to speed evaporation of moisture. If the
ambient temperature is lower than 15.6°C (60°F), ice might form before moisture removal is complete. Heat
lamps or alternate sources of heat may be used to raise the system temperature.
4. Remove all R-744 refrigerant from the system. See Section 7.2.5.
5. Connect both low side and high side manifold gauges to the vacuum pump and electronic vacuum gauge.
See Figure 7.2, Figure 7.3 for evacuation diagram.

T-370 7–4
 6. Test the evacuation setup for any connection leaks by closing the low side and high side service fittings and
drawing a deep vacuum with the vacuum pump and gauge valves open. Shut off the pump and check to see
if the vacuum holds. Repair leaks if necessary.
7. Open the low side and high side service fittings.
8. Start the vacuum pump. Evacuate the unit until the electronic vacuum gauge indicates 2000 microns. Close
the electronic vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut off the vacuum pump. Wait a few minutes to
be sure the vacuum holds.
9. Break the vacuum with clean dry CO2 (R-744) refrigerant. Raise system pressure to roughly 0.14 bar (2
psig), monitoring it with the compound gauge.
10. Evacuate unit to 500 microns.
11. Close the electronic vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut off the vacuum pump. Wait five minutes
to see if vacuum holds. This procedure checks for residual moisture and/or leaks.
12. With a vacuum still in the unit, the refrigerant charge may be drawn into the system from a refrigerant
container on a weight scale.
7.2.8 Charging, Vapor Method

NOTICE
Only use Refrigerant R-744 with a Purity level of 99.9% CO2. Refer to nameplate for required charge.

NOTE
In cold ambient temperatures it may be necessary to raise the bottle pressure by warming the cylinder.
This is accomplished by using a cylinder warmer or by moving the cylinder into warm ambient conditions.

NOTE
To completely open the system the Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV), Unloader Solenoid Valve
(USV), and High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV) must be opened. See Section 7.2.4.
1. Evacuate the unit and leave in a deep vacuum. See Section 7.2.7.
2. Place the R-744 cylinder on a scale and connect the utility hose from the service gauge to the pressure
regulator. See Figure 7.2, Figure 7.3 for Evacuation diagram.
3. With the supply valve closed on the regulator, open the valve on the cylinder. The gauge on the regulator will
now show the R-744 cylinder pressure.
4. Purge the utility hose by partially unthreading the hose on the manifold gauge set and opening the supply on
the regulator. Tighten the hose on the gauge and close the supply line.
5. Zero out the scale or note the starting weight.
6. Open the low side and high side hand valves by turning the knobs counterclockwise. See Figure 7.2,
Figure 7.3 for evacuation diagram.
7. Allow the R-744 refrigerant to flow into the unit until the correct weight of refrigerant has been added as
indicated by the scale.
8. If you are unable to get the full charge into the unit based on ambient conditions, the following additional
steps should be taken:
a. Remove magnets and refit coils to ESV, USV and HPXV.
b. Close the high side hand valve on the manifold gauge set.
c. Turn the unit on. The suction side pressure will reduce and the unit will start to draw the remaining refrig-
erant into the system.
9. Close the low side service connection by turning the knob clockwise once desired charge is reached.
10. Close the valve on the R-744 cylinder and bleed out remaining pressure in the utility line by partially
unthreading the hose.
11. Start the unit in cooling mode. Run for approximately 10 minutes to make sure the unit is cooling properly.
12. Remove the gauge set. See Section 7.2.3.

7–5 T-370
 Figure 7.2 Refrigeration Evacuation & Charging Diagram - PIDs lower than NT5010

16 15

14

5
1

7 3

8 4

10
2 6

13
11 9 12

1) Discharge Service Fitting (high side) 9) Utility Hose to Vacuum Pump

2) Discharge Hose (high side) 10) Electronic Vacuum Gauge
3) Discharge Gauge (high side) 11) Vacuum Pump
4) Discharge Hand Valve (high side) 12) Utility Hose to R-744 Bottle
5) Suction Service Fitting (low side) 13) R-744 Bottle
6) Suction Hose (low side) 14) Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV)
7) Suction Gauge (low side) 15) Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
8) Suction Hand Valve (low side) 16) High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV)
-----

T-370 7–6
 Figure 7.3 Refrigeration Evacuation & Charging Diagram - PIDs NT5010 and higher

5
16 15

14

7 3

8 9 4

10
2 6

9 12 13
11

1) Discharge Service Valve (high side) 9) Utility Hose to Vacuum Pump

2) Discharge Hose (high side) 10) Electronic Vacuum Gauge
3) Discharge Gauge (high side) 11) Vacuum Pump
4) Discharge Hand Valve (high side) 12) Utility Hose to R-744 Bottle
5) Suction Service Valve (low side) 13) R-744 Bottle
6) Suction Hose (low side) 14) Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV)
7) Suction Gauge (low side) 15) Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
8) Suction Hand Valve (low side) 16) High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV)
-----

7–7 T-370
7.3 Compressor

! WARNING
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and power plug disconnected before replacing the compressor.

! WARNING
Before disassembly of the compressor, be sure to relieve the internal pressure very carefully by
slightly loosening the couplings to break the seal.

NOTICE
Compressor is shipped without oil in the compressor.

Figure 7.4 Compressor

3 6 7

1) Flange Bolts 5) Suction Flange

2) Terminal Block / Plate 6) Mounting Bolts
3) Mounting Bolts 7) Oil Drain
4) Flange Bolt
-----

7.3.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor

NOTE
The service replacement of the compressor is sold without terminal box and cover, service connection,
and Suction Pressure Transducer. The customer should retain these components for use on
replacement compressor.

1. Turn the unit Start-Stop switch (ST) and unit Circuit Breaker (CB-1) Off.
2. Disconnect power to the unit.
3. Remove all refrigerant from the unit. See Section 7.2.5.
4. Locate the compressor terminal box. Tag and disconnect the wiring from the compressor terminals and
remove the compressor terminal box. The terminal box will be used on the new compressor.
5. Loosen the compressor flange mounting bolts, break the seal and then remove the bolts.
6. Remove the compressor mounting bolts.

T-370 7–8
7. Remove the compressor and mounting plate (if compressor has a plate). See Section 3.2 for weight of
compressor.
8. Remove the Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT) from compressor and check operation of switch. See
Section 7.5.1. The SPT will be used on the new compressor.
9. Remove service fittings from the compressor. The service fittings will be used on the new compressor.
10. Place the compressor in a position where it will be convenient to drain the oil. Remove the oil drain plug (see
Figure 7.4) and allow the oil to drain out slowly. The compressor will need to be angled to remove all the oil.
11. Measure the amount of oil drained from the compressor.
12. Add four mls. of AR-GLO 5E dye to the new replacement compressor oil.
13. Pour the equivalent amount of new oil into the suction side flange of the new compressor. See Figure 7.4.
The compressor suction side may need to be elevated for better angle to pour oil in.

NOTICE
When installing service fittings and the Suction Pressure Transducer, a new O-ring must be
installed with each. See Section 7.4 for instructions on installing the O-rings.

14. Install the service fittings with new O-rings on the replacement compressor and torque to 27 Nm (20 ft-lb).
15. Install the SPT with a new O-ring on the replacement compressor and torque to 27 Nm (20 ft-lb).
16. Install the replacement compressor in the unit.
17. Install the compressor mounting bolts and torque to 22.6 Nm (16.67 ft-lb).
18. If replacement compressor has mounting plate, install the compressor plate mounting bolts and torque to
22.6 Nm (16.67 ft-lb).
19. Connect the junction box to the replacement compressor and use the terminal wiring kit to rewire the
compressor. Follow the instructions included with the kit.
20. Install the junction box cover.
21. Install the compressor flanges with new metal gaskets.
22. Install the flange mounting bolts and torque to 36.61 Nm (27 ft-lb).
23. Connect the high side and low side service gauges to the discharge and suction service fittings. See
Section 7.2.2.
24. Dehydrate and evacuate the system to 500 microns (75.9 cm Hg vacuum = 29.90 inches Hg vacuum). See
Section 7.2.7.
25. Charge the unit with refrigerant. See Section 7.2.8.
26. After the unit has been fully charged, remove the service gauges. See Section 7.2.3.
27. Start the unit and check operation.
28. If the compressor is equipped with a sight glass, the oil level should be between 1/4 and 3/4 of the sight
glass while operating.
29. Clean the area below the foot of the compressor with local cleaner and install the icing label on the frame in
front of the compressor (part # 62-66170-00).

7–9 T-370
7.4 O-Ring Installation
7.4.1 Installation
This procedure is intended for all O-ring installations for this unit. A Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) is used for
illustration purposes in this procedure.
1. Place electrical tape around the threads of the component to protect the O-ring from damage during
installation. See Figure 7.5.
2. Apply a small amount of Super O-lube to the O-ring, making sure to coat the entire surface. See Figure 7.6.
3. Slide the O-ring over the tape and onto the component. See Figure 7.7.
4. Remove electrical tape. See Figure 7.8.

Figure 7.5 O-Ring - Electrical Tape Figure 7.7 O-Ring - Slide On O-Ring

Figure 7.8 O-Ring - Remove Electrical Tape

Figure 7.6 O-Ring - Apply Super O-lube

7.4.2 Adding Loctite 55 Thread Sealing Cord

On completion of the O-ring installation for components: Flash Tank Pressure Transducer (FPT), Discharge
Pressure Transducer (DPT) and the high side coupling, add Loctite 55 thread sealing cord by following the
procedure below.
1. Cut 7.5 cm (3 inch) of cord length from the Loctite 55 tube.
2. Twist the cord between the fingers to prevent fraying, rotate fingers in opposite directions. See Figure 7.9.
3. Locate the 3rd and 6th thread on the fitting. See Figure 7.10.
4. Wrap Loctite 55 cord around the transducer starting on the 3rd thread and end at the 6th thread in clockwise
direction, overlap is not necessary but two full threads need to be covered and seated within the threads.
See Figure 7.11, Figure 7.12.
5. The cord should be in contact with the threads without any loose ends, trimming off any excess. See Figure
7.13.
6. Hand tighten the transducer until the cord is fully rolled in the fitting. No part of the cord should be seen
pushed out of the fitting thread. See Figure 7.14.
7. Torque to 9.5Nm - 10.8Nm (7 - 8 ft-lb).

T-370 7–10
 Figure 7.9 Loctite 55 - Twist Cord Figure 7.12 Loctite 55 - Wrap Cord

Figure 7.13 Loctite 55 - Trim Excess Cord

Figure 7.10 Loctite 55 - Locate Threads

3rd 6th

Figure 7.14 Loctite 55 - Tighten Transducer

Figure 7.11 Loctite 55 - Wrap Cord

7.5 High Pressure Switch

7.5.1 Checking a High Pressure Switch
1. Connect a set of gauges to the unit or read the unit pressure at code Cd14. If the pressure is below 100.6
bars (1430 psig), the switch should be closed. See Section 7.5.2.
2. Using an Ohm meter check the continuity of the switch. The ohm meter will indicate no resistance or the
continuity light will be illuminated. If the switch is open, it should be replaced. See Section 7.5.2.

7.5.2 Replacing a High Pressure Switch

The High Pressure Switch (HPS) is located on the 2nd stage discharge connection. See Figure 3.5.
1. Remove the refrigerant charge from the unit. See Section 7.2.5.
2. Disconnect wiring from the switch to be replaced.
3. Remove the High Pressure Switch (HPS) by turning the assembly counterclockwise.
4. See Section 7.4 for installation of O-ring on High Pressure Switch (HPS).
5. Install a new High Pressure Switch (HPS) and then run P-7 to confirm the settings for the switch are correct.
6. Evacuate and dehydrate the system. See Section 7.2.7.
7. Recharge the system. See Section 7.2.8.
8. Start the unit, and then verify refrigeration charge.

7–11 T-370
7.6 Pressure Transducer
7.6.1 Replacing a Pressure Transducer
For location of the pressure transducers, see Section 3.1.4.
1. Remove the refrigerant charge from the unit. See Section 7.2.5.
2. Disconnect wiring from the pressure transducer.
3. Remove the pressure transducer by turning the assembly counterclockwise.
4. See Section 7.4 for installation of the O-ring on the pressure transducer.
5. Install a new pressure transducer.
6. Evacuate and dehydrate the system. See Section 7.2.7.
7. Recharge the system. See Section 7.2.8.
8. Start the unit, and then verify refrigeration charge.

NOTE
The transducer should be used within 48 hours after cord wrapping.

7.7 Pressure Relief Valve

There are three Pressure Relief Valves (PRV) located in the NaturaLINE unit. See Section 3.1.4 for location.

7.7.1 Replacing a Pressure Relief Valve

! DANGER
There are no serviceable parts on a pressure relief valve (PRV). Attempting to repair or alter the
PRV is not permitted. If the PRV has released pressure, the entire PRV must be replaced.
1. Remove the refrigerant charge from the unit. See Section 7.2.5.
2. Remove the pressure relief valve.
3. Verify no contaminants have entered into the orifice.
4. See Section 7.4 for installation of an O-ring on the pressure relief valve.
5. Install a new pressure relief valve using correct torque. Wrench on 1-1/8” hexagon flats only, do not wrench
on round surfaces. See Section 3.3 for torque requirements.
6. Evacuate and dehydrate the system. See Section 7.2.7.
7. Recharge the system. See Section 7.2.8.
8. Start the unit, and then verify refrigeration charge.

7.8 Gas Cooler / Intercooler Coil

The Gas Cooler consists of the Gas Cooler and the Intercooler sections.

7.8.1 Gas Cooler Coil Cleaning

Keep the coil clean to maximize air flow and maintain proper heat transfer. If cleaning is required, use fresh water.

NOTE
Use low water pressure when cleaning coils to avoid damage.

7.8.2 Gas Cooler Coil Replacement

! WARNING
Do not open the Gas Cooler fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting power plug.
1. Remove the refrigerant charge from the unit. See Section 7.2.5.
2. Remove the Gas Cooler fan grille and side panels.

T-370 7–12
 3. Unsolder the (2) Intercooler and (2) Gas Cooler lines.
4. Remove the coil mounting hardware and remove the coil assembly.
5. Install the replacement coil and mounting hardware.
6. Solder the Intercooler and Gas Cooler connections.
7. Leak-check the unit coil connections. See Section 7.2.6.
8. Evacuate and dehydrate the system. See Section 7.2.7.
9. Recharge the system. See Section 7.2.8.
10. Secure fan grille and any panels that may have been removed.

7.9 Gas Cooler Fan and Motor Assembly

! WARNING
Do not open Gas Cooler fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting power plug
The Gas Cooler fan rotates counterclockwise as viewed from front of unit. The fan pulls air through the coil, and
discharges air horizontally through the front of the unit. To replace the motor assembly:
1. Remove the Gas Cooler fan grille.
2. Loosen the two set screws on fan. (Thread sealer has been applied to set screws at installation.)

NOTICE
Do not pull or pry from the outer edge of the fan as this may damage the fan.
3. Remove the fan assembly.
4. Unplug the wiring connector.
5. Mark the location of the fan motor and keep the hardware in the same location for reassembly.
6. Remove motor mounting hardware and replace the motor. It is recommended that new locknuts be used
when replacing the motor.
7. Connect the wiring connector.
8. Install the fan loosely on the motor shaft (hub side in). DO NOT USE FORCE. If necessary, tap the hub only,
not the hub nuts or bolts. Apply “Loctite H” to the (2) fan set screws. Adjust the fan within the venturi so that
the outer edge of the fan is within 2.0 +/- 0.07 mm (0.08” +/- 0.03”) from the outside of the orifice opening.
Spin the fan by hand to check clearance.
9. Secure the fan grille and any panels that may have been removed.

7.10 Filter Drier

! CAUTION
Do not touch the Filter Drier to check for temperature difference while the unit is operating.
Refer to troubleshooting for when to replace the Filter Drier due to restriction.

NOTE
The Filter Drier should be replaced any time the system is opened up for service.

Replacing the Filter Drier:

1. Remove the refrigerant charge from the unit. See Section 7.2.5.
2. Remove Filter Drier by loosening the compression fittings.
3. Install the new Filter Drier and tighten the compression fittings.Torque to 18.4-22.1 Nm (25-30 ft-lb).
4. Evacuate and dehydrate the system. See Section 7.2.7.
5. Recharge the system. See Section 7.2.8.

7–13 T-370
7.11 Evaporator Coil Assembly
The evaporator section, including the coil, should be cleaned regularly. Restrictions in the evaporator coil restrict air
flow through the coil and reduce heat transfer. The preferred cleaning fluid is fresh water or steam. Another
recommended cleaner is Oakite 202 or similar, following manufacturer’s instructions.
The two drain pan hoses are routed behind the Gas Cooler fan motor and compressor. The drain pan line(s) must be
open to ensure adequate drainage.

7.11.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement

1. Remove the refrigerant charge from the unit. See Section 7.2.5.
2. With power OFF and power plug removed, remove the screws securing the panel covering the evaporator
section (upper panel).
3. Disconnect the defrost heater wiring.
4. Remove the mounting hardware from the coil.
5. Unsolder the two coil connections, one at the distributor and the other at the coil header.
6. Disconnect the Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS), the Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT) and ground
wire from the center tube sheet. See Figure 3.2.
7. Remove middle coil support.
8. After defective coil is removed from unit, remove defrost heaters and install on replacement coil.
9. Install coil assembly by reversing above steps.
10. Leak check evaporator coil connections.
11. Evacuate and dehydrate the system. See Section 7.2.7.
12. Recharge the system. See Section 7.2.8.

7.12 Evaporator Heater

Figure 7.15 Heater Arrangement

2
1

1) Heater Element 3) Retainer

2) Bracket
-----

7.12.1 Evaporator Heater Removal and Replacement

The heaters are wired directly back to the contactor and if a heater failure occurs during a trip, the heater set
containing that heater may be disconnected at the contactor.
The next Pre-trip will detect that a heater set has been disconnected and indicate that the failed heater should be
replaced.

T-370 7–14
7.12.2 Megger Testing the Heaters

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers, disconnect the main power supply, and perform Lock Out
/ Tag Out before working on moving parts.
All of the checks performed during this procedure should be carried out using a 500v Meg-ohm tester.
1. Connect the ground wire from the insulation tester to a fixed ground point, preferably the ground plate in the
control box.
2. At the load side of the heater contactor, check the insulation resistance to ground.
If readings are > 2 Mohm, then the heaters are operating properly and no action is needed.
If readings are < 1 Mohm, then the faulty heater needs to be identified. Proceed to step 3 for units with a
heater access panel or step 4 for units without a heater access panel.
If readings are between 1 and 2 Mohm, then the heaters need to be re-tested with the following steps:
a. Reconnect the unit to power and power the unit on.
b. Set the unit set point to a minimum of 10°C higher than the current temperature of the container. Allow
the unit to go into heat mode, reach the temperature set point and maintain for 10-15 minutes.
c. Power the unit off. Allow the unit to cool to ambient temperature.
d. Connect the ground wire from the insulation tester to a fixed ground point, preferably the ground plate in
the control box.
e. At the load side of the heater contactor, check the insulation resistance to ground.
If readings are > 1 Mohm, then the heaters are operating properly and no action is needed.
If readings are < 1 Mohm, then the faulty heater needs to be identified. Proceed to step 3 for units with a
heater access panel or step 4 for units without a heater access panel.
3. Identify the faulty heater(s) for units with a heater access panel:
a. Open the access panel and cut out all wire splices to isolate all heaters inside of the unit.
b. Repeat the Megger test on each individual heater. Connect the ground clip to the outer metal sheath of
the heater and the test clip to one of the wires from the same heater.
c. Replace any heater where the readings are < 1 Mohm.
4. Identify the faulty heater(s) for units without a heater access panel:
a. Remove all six connections from the Heater (HR) contactor load side, which splits the six heaters into
three separate pairs.
b. Identify the following three wires: DHTL, DHML, DHBL. There is one from each load connection.
c. Repeat the Megger test on each pair of heaters to identify the faulty heater pair. Connect the ground clip
from the insulation tester to a fixed ground point on the unit, preferably the ground plate in the control
box. Connect the test clip to one of the wires stated above.
d. Test all three wires and replace any heater pair that has readings < 1 Mohm.
5. If the unit is loaded, and the heater can not be immediately replaced, perform the following steps:
a. Identify the wire at the opposite end of the faulty heater pair: DHTL - DHTR, DHML - DHMR, DHBL -
DHBR.
b. Isolate the two wires.
c. Reconnect the remaining good wiring pairs to their original connections.
d. The unit will fail the PTI test P1-0 at the next pre-trip inspection. Repair action can be taken at that time.
6. If the unit is empty, replace the faulty heater:

7–15 T-370
 ! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers, disconnect the main power supply, and perform Lock Out
/ Tag Out before working on moving parts.
a. With the heater pair identified, remove the upper back panel inside the container.
b. Identify the center point connection for the heater pair (black wiring from heaters) either against the unit
back wall or in the wiring loom.
c. Cut the splice to separate the two heaters.
d. Carry out a Megger check on the two heaters in the same way as for units with heater panel. Replace
any heater where the Megger readings are < 1 Mohms.

NOTE
If all heaters are above the acceptable limit with the wiring disconnected, then this indicates that the
fault was in one or more of the wire splices that were removed.
e. Remove the hold-down clamp securing the heater(s) to the coil.
f. Verify that the heaters are not hot before handling them.
g. Lift the bent end of the heater (with the opposite end down and away from the coil). Move the heater to
the side enough to clear the heater end support and remove.
h. To install heater, reverse steps.
i. Reconnect all wiring using new splices and heat shrink where needed. The heat shrink MUST have a
'melt-able' liner to ensure that the connections are properly sealed when shrunk. This can be seen as a
'Ring' of melt liner pushed from under the heat shrink at each end of the shrink tube.

NOTE
Failure to use melt liner heat shrink allows moisture to 'wick' up under the heat shrink and cause a
leakage path.

7.13 Evaporator Fan And Motor Assembly

The evaporator fans circulate air throughout the container by pulling air in the top of the unit. The air is forced
through the evaporator coil where it is either heated or cooled and then discharged out the bottom of the
refrigeration unit into the container. The fan motor bearings are factory lubricated and do not require additional
grease.

T-370 7–16
 Figure 7.16 Evaporator Fan Assembly

4
2
5
3

1) Locknut, 5/8-18 6) Screw, 1/4

2) Flat Washer, 5/8 7) Flat Washer, 1/4
3) Stator 8) Mylar Protector
4) Flat Washer, 5/8 9) Evaporator Motor
5) Impeller Fan
-----

7.13.1 Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers, disconnect the main power supply, and perform Lock Out
/ Tag Out before working on moving parts.
1. Remove the upper access panel (see Figure 3.2) by removing mounting bolts and TIR locking device.
Reach inside of unit and remove the Ty-Rap securing the wire harness loop. Disconnect the connector by
twisting to unlock and pulling to separate.
2. Loosen four 1/4-20 clamp bolts that are located on the underside of the fan deck at the sides of the fan
assembly. Slide the loosened clamps back from the fan assembly.
3. Slide the fan assembly out from the unit and place on a sturdy work surface.

7.13.2 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly

1. Secure the fan blade so that it cannot turn. Then, loosen the 5/8-18 shaft nut by turning the 5/8-18 nut
counter-clockwise. See Figure 7.16.
2. Use a universal wheel puller and remove the fan from the shaft.
3. Remove the washers and key.
4. Remove the four 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts that are located under the fan that support the motor and stator
housing.
5. Remove the motor and plastic spacer.

7–17 T-370
7.13.3 Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly
1. Assemble the motor and plastic spacer onto the stator.

NOTICE
When removing the black nylon evaporator fan blade, care must be taken to assure that the
blade is not damaged. In the past, it was a common practice to insert a screwdriver between
the fan blades to keep it from turning. This practice can no longer be used, as the blade is
made up of a material that will be damaged. It is recommended that an impact wrench be used
when removing the blade. Do not use the impact wrench when reinstalling, as galling of the
stainless steel shaft can occur.
2. Apply Loctite to the 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts and torque to 7.9Nm (70 in-lb).
3. Place one 5/8 flat washer on the shoulder of the fan motor shaft. Insert the key in the keyway and lubricate
the fan motor shaft and threads with a graphite-oil solution (such as Never-seez).
4. Install the fan onto the motor shaft. Place one 5/8 flat washer with a 5/8-18 locknut onto the motor shaft and
torque to 40 foot-pounds.
5. Install the evaporator fan assembly in reverse order of removal. Torque the four 1/4-20 clamp bolts to 7.9Nm
(70 in-lb). Connect the wiring connector.
6. Replace access panel making sure that panel does not leak. Make sure that the TIR locking device is
lockwired.

7.14 Evaporator Section Cleaning

Containers and Container units that are exposed to certain fumigants may develop visible surface corrosion. This
corrosion will show up as a white powder found on the inside of the container and on the reefer unit evaporator
stator and fan deck.
Analyses by Carrier Transicold environmental specialists have identified the white powder as consisting
predominantly of aluminum oxide. Aluminum oxide is a coarse crystalline deposit most likely the result of surface
corrosion on the aluminum parts within the container. If left untreated over time, it may build up in thickness and
eventually flake as a lightweight white powder.
The surface corrosion of aluminum is brought about by exposure to chemicals such as sulfur dioxide and possibly
other fumigants that are commonly used for fumigation and protection of some perishable cargo such as grapes, for
example. Fumigation is the process by which a chemical is released into an enclosed area to eliminate infestations
of insects, termites, rodents, weeds and soil-born disease.
Typically any aluminum oxide that becomes detached from evaporator fan stators will be blown into the wet
evaporator coil where it will be caught and then flushed out of the unit during routine defrost cycles.
However, it is still highly recommended that after carrying cargo subject to fumigation procedures, that the inside of
the unit be thoroughly cleansed prior to reuse.
Carrier Transicold has identified a fully biodegradable and environmentally safe alkaline cleaning agent (Tri-Pow’r®
HD) for the unit. This will assist in helping to remove the corrosive fumigation chemicals and dislodging of the
corrosive elements.
This cleaner is available from the Carrier Transicold Performance Parts Group (PPG) and can be ordered through
any of the PPG locations; Part Number NU4371-88.
As a general safety precaution, before using this product, refer to and retain the Material Safety Data (MSDS) sheet.
Cleaning Guidelines:
• Use low water pressure when cleaning coils to avoid damage.
• Always wear goggles, gloves and work boots.
• Avoid contact with skin and clothing, and avoid breathing mists.
• When mixing, add water to the sprayer first, then the cleaner.
• ALWAYS provide for proper ventilation when cleaning indoor evaporator coils (rear doors must be open).
• Be aware of surroundings - food, plants, etc., and the potential for human exposure.
• Always read directions and follow recommended dilution ratios. More is not always better. Using non-diluted
cleaner is not recommended.

T-370 7–18
Cleaning Procedure:
1. Remove the upper evaporator access panel inside of the unit.
2. Spray the surface with water before applying the cleaning solution. This helps the cleaner work better.
3. Liberally apply the prepared cleaner solution (5 parts water and 1 part cleaner).
4. Allow the cleaner to soak in for 5 to 7 minutes.
5. Assess area for rinsing. Follow all local regulations regarding disposal of waste water.
6. Thoroughly rinse the cleaner and surrounding area, floor, etc. When rinsing where heavy foaming solution is
present, it is very important to take the time to thoroughly rinse the equipment and surroundings.
7. Always rinse the empty coil cleaner bottle, cap tightly and dispose of properly.

7.15 Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)

The Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) is an automatic device which maintains required superheat of the refrigerant
gas leaving the evaporator. For location of the Electronic Expansion Valve, see Figure 3.2.
The valve functions are:
a. Automatic response of refrigerant flow to match the evaporator load.
b. Prevention of liquid refrigerant entering the compressor. Unless the valve is defective, it seldom requires
any maintenance.

7.15.1 Removing an EEV or HPXV:

1. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit.
2. Remove the coil (applies only to the HPXV).
3. Remove the refrigerant charge from the unit. See Section 7.2.5.
4. The preferred method of removing the valve is to cut the connection between the brazed section and the valve,
using a small tube cutter. The valve can also be removed by un-brazing the connection. Remove valve.

7.15.2 Installing an EEV or HPXV:

1. Make sure that there is no brazing material in the lines, and install the new valve.
2. When brazing in the new valve, the power head should be cooled with wet cloth.
3. Make sure that the HPXV coil is snapped down fully, and the coil retention tab is properly seated in one of
the valve body dimples.
Important Notes:
• Retention tab is not visible with the coil boot fitted as shown in Figure 7.17.
• For better visualization, see Figure 7.18 for correct position of the coil with the retention tab sited in one
of the valve body dimples.
• Do not remove the coil boot from the valve.
4. Grab and rotate the coil for approximately 1/4 turn in either direction (see Figure 7.17) and make sure that
you can feel the clicking as the coil retention tab is moving from dimple to dimple.
Figure 7.17 HPXV Coil Boot Figure 7.18 HPXV Valve Body Dimples

7–19 T-370
 5. Apply the blue dot on the unit side wall next to the coil indicating that the coil has been inspected and is
seated correctly on the valve body.
6. If a coil is seated incorrectly on a loaded unit once it has been seated properly, power cycle the unit. This
enables the controller to reset the valve to 0% to ensure proper operation going forward.
7. Replace the Filter Drier. See Section 7.10.
8. Evacuate and dehydrate the system. See Section 7.2.7.
9. Recharge the system. See Section 7.2.8.
10. Check unit operation by running Pre-trip. See Section 4.7.

7.16 Humidity Sensor (HS)

The humidity sensor is an optional component that allows setting of a humidity setpoint in the controller. In
dehumidification mode, the controller will operate to reduce internal container moisture level.

7.16.1 Checking the Operation of the Humidity Sensor

This procedure is to be performed in an effort to ease the troubleshooting of the humidity sensor. When performing
this procedure and while working on the unit, always follow the proper lockout/tagout procedures.
Items Required:
• One 7/16” socket wrench or nut driver.
• One 1/4” socket wrench or nut driver.
• One clean, clear water bottle with a minimum 6 cm (2.5 in) opening and capacity to hold 500 ml (16.9 oz).
• 100 ml (3.4 oz) of fresh water - distilled if available.
• 50 gm of Salt (NaCl).
Procedure:
1. Remove the left Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent panel.
2. Remove the humidity sensor from the mounting hardware and bring to the front of the access panel.
3. Disconnect the humidity sensor from the harness.
4. Drill a 3 cm (1.25 in) hole in the cap of a bottle.
5. Pour approximately 100 ml (3.4 oz) of water into the empty clean bottle.
6. Add salt to the water until it is present at the bottom of the bottle.
7. Cap the bottle and tape over the drilled hole.
8. Shake the bottle until the salt dissolves and water is saturated.

NOTE
To ensure saturation, add additional salt until it settles at the bottom without dissolving while shaking.
9. Remove the cap and insert the humidity sensor into the bottle through the bottle opening and pull the connector
back through the drilled hole in the cap. Then, secure the cap and seal the wire going through the cap.

T-370 7–20
 NOTE
Make sure that the sensor is not at all in contact with the salt water.

Cap opening (6 cm) Cap hole (3 cm)

Humidity Sensor

Salt water solution

10. Allow the saturated salt mixture to settle for approximately ten minutes.
11. Reconnect the humidity sensor to the harness and power the reefer unit on.
12. Press the CODE SELECT key on the keypad.
13. Use the Arrow keys until “Cd17” is displayed then press the ENTER key.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

14. This displays the humidity sensor reading. Verify the reading is between 60% and 85% relative humidity.
15. If the humidity sensor display is outside of this range, reconfirm the salt mixture and retest. If not in range,
replace the sensor at the next opportunity.
16. Wipe clean and reinstall the humidity sensor and access panel. Torque the access panel hardware to 69 kg-
cm (60 in.-lbs.) using a crossing pattern similar to the numbering below.

17. If the panel gasket is damaged and needs to be replaced, use the following part numbers:
• 42-00296-01: Standard Panel Gasket
• 42-00823-00: XtendFRESH Panel Gasket

7.17 Economizer Solenoid Valve, Unloader Solenoid Valve

The procedures for removing / replacing the ESV and removing / replacing the USV are the same.
For location of the Economizer Solenoid Valve and the Unloader Solenoid Valve, see Figure 3.3.

7–21 T-370
7.17.1 Removing / Replacing the ESV or USV Coil
1. Remove the valve coil from the valve. See Figure 7.19.
2. Cut the cable approximately 3 inches (75 mm) from the coil.
3. Connect the new coil wires using butt-splices and heat-shrink tubing.
4. Replace the coil on the valve, make sure that the coil is fully seated.

7.17.2 Removing / Replacing the ESV or USV

1. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit.
2. Remove the refrigerant charge from the unit. See Section 7.2.5.
3. Remove the valve coil from the valve. See Figure 7.19.
Figure 7.19 Coil View of Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)

Solenoid Coil

O-Ring

Solenoid

4. VALVE REMOVAL: The preferred method of removing the solenoid valve is to cut the connection between
the brazed section and the valve, using a small tube cutter. The valve can also be removed by un-brazing
the connection. Then remove the valve. Remove valve.
5. Fit the new solenoid valve into position and braze. Use a wet rag to keep valve cool whenever brazing.
6. Install the O-ring on the valve stem (provided). See Figure 7.19.
7. Press the coil onto the valve stem ensuring that it is pressed all the way down, engaging with the O-ring.

7.18 Removing / Replacing the Flash Tank

The NaturaLINE unit is equipped with a flash tank. See Figure 3.3 for location.

! DANGER
There are no serviceable parts on the flash tank. Attempting to repair the flash tank or welding
on the flash tank vessel is not permitted. If the flash tank should be damaged in any way the
entire flash tank must be replaced.

T-370 7–22
Removing the Flash Tank:
1. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit.
2. Remove the refrigerant charge from the unit. See Section 7.2.5.
3. Remove flash tank pressure relief valve.
4. Un-braze the tube connections.
5. Remove the bolts securing the flash tank to the unit (4 places).
6. Take out flash tank.

Installing the Flash Tank:

1. Bolt flash tank to the unit (4 places).
2. Braze only at the tube connections.
3. Install pressure relief valve with new O-ring onto flash tank. See Section 7.4.
4. Replace Filter Drier. See Section 7.10.
5. Evacuate and dehydrate the system. See Section 7.2.7.
6. Recharge the system. See Section 7.2.8.
7. Check unit operation by running Pre-trip. See Section 4.6.

7.19 Controller

NOTICE
The NaturaLINE platform must use the green label controller only (part number 12-55011).

7.19.1 Handling Modules

! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from module unless you are grounded to the unit frame with a
static safe wrist strap.

! CAUTION
Unplug all module connectors before performing arc welding on any part of the container.

The guidelines and cautions provided herein should be followed when handling the modules. These precautions and
procedures should be implemented when replacing a module, when doing any arc welding on the unit, or when
service to the refrigeration unit requires handling and removal of a module.
1. Obtain a grounding wrist strap (Carrier Transicold part number 07-00304-00) and a static dissipation mat
(Carrier Transicold part number 07-00277-00). The wrist strap, when properly grounded, will dissipate any
potential buildup on the body. The dissipation mat will provide a static-free work surface on which to place
and/or service the modules.
2. Disconnect and secure power to the unit.
3. Place strap on wrist and attach the ground end to any exposed unpainted metal area on the refrigeration
unit frame (bolts, screws, etc.).
4. Carefully remove the module. Do not touch any of the electrical connections if possible. Place the module
on the static mat.
5. The strap should be worn during any service work on a module, even when it is placed on the mat.

7–23 T-370
7.19.2 Controller Troubleshooting
A group of test points, TP1 - TP10, are provided on the controller for troubleshooting electrical circuits. See Figure
7.20 and schematic diagram in Section 8.

NOTICE
Use a digital voltmeter to measure AC voltage between TP’s and ground (TP9), except for TP8.

Figure 7.20 Controller Section of the Control Box

1) Mounting Screw 3) Controller Software Programming Port

2) Controller 4) Test Points
-----

Table 7–1 Test Point Descriptions

Test Point Description
TP1 Check if the controller unloader valve relay (TU) is open or closed.
TP2 Check if the High Pressure Switch (HPS) is open or closed.
TP3 Test point is not used in this application.
TP4 Check whether the internal protector for the Gas Cooler fan (IP-GM) is open or closed.
Check whether the internal protectors for the evaporator fan motors (IP-EM1 or IPEM2)
TP5
are open or closed.
TP6 Test point is not used in this application.
TP7 Check whether the controller Economizer Solenoid Valve relay (TS) is open or closed.
TP8 Test point is not used in this application.
TP9 Chassis (unit frame) ground connection.
TP10 Check whether the heat termination thermostat (HTT) contact is open or closed.

T-370 7–24
7.19.3 Controller Programming Procedure

! CAUTION
The unit must be OFF whenever a programming card is inserted or removed from the controller
programming port.

Procedure for Loading Operational Software:

1. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0” to turn power off.
2. Insert the software / programming PCMCIA card into the programming port on the controller (see Figure
7.20). The PCMCIA card will contain the following (example) files:
• menuDDMM.ml3, this file allows the user to select a file/program to upload into the controller.
• cfYYMMDD.ml3, multi-configuration file.
3. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “I” to turn unit power on.
4. The display will display the message “SEt UP”.
5. Press the Up or Down Arrow keys until the display reads “LOAd 57XX”. The XX represents the software
revision.
6. Press the ENTER key.
7. The display will alternate between the messages “PrESS EntR” and “rEV 57XX”.
8. Press the ENTER key.
9. The display will show the message “Pro SoFt”. This message will last for up to one minute as the new
software is loading.When software loading is complete, the display will show the message “Pro donE”.
If a problem occurs while loading the software, the display will blink the message “Pro FAIL” or
“bad 12V”. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0” and remove the card.
10. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0” to turn unit power off.
11. Remove the PCMCIA card from the programming slot.
12. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “I” to return the unit to normal operation.
13. On power up, the status LED will flash quickly and the display will remain blank as the controller loads the
new software. This takes about 15 seconds. When complete, the controller will reset and power up normally.
14. Wait for the default display to appear: setpoint on the left, and control temperature on the right.
15. To confirm the correct software loaded, use the keypad to bring up function code Cd18.

Procedure for Loading Configuration Software:

1. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0” to turn power off.
2. Insert the software / programming PCMCIA card into the programming port on the controller (see Figure
7.20). The PCMCIA card will contain the following (example) files:
• menuDDMM.ml3, this file allows the user to select a file/program to upload into the controller.
• cfYYMMDD.ml3, multi-configuration file.
3. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “I” to turn unit power on.
4. The display will display the message “SEt UP”.
5. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
6. The display will read “ruN COnFG”.
If the display has blinking message “bAd CArd”, then the card is defective. Place the Start-Stop switch
(ST) to “0” to turn power off and remove the card
7. Press the ENTER key.
8. The display module will go blank briefly and then display “6XX XXX”, based on the current operational
software installed.

7–25 T-370
 9. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until the display reads the desired model number.
10. Press the ENTER key.
11. When software loading has successfully completed, the display will show the message “COnFG donE”.
If the display has blinking message “Pro FAIL” or “bad 12V”, then a problem has occurred while
loading the software. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0” to turn unit power off and remove the
card.
12. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0” to turn unit power off.
13. Remove the PCMCIA card from the programming slot.
14. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “I” to return the unit to normal operation.
15. To confirm the correct model configuration was loaded, use the keypad to bring up function code Cd20. The
model displayed should match the last five digits of the model number listed on the unit nameplate (see
Figure 2.1).

Procedure for Setting the Date and Time:

1. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0” to turn power off.
2. Insert the software / programming PCMCIA card into the programming port on the controller (see Figure
7.20). The PCMCIA card will contain the following (example) files:
• menuDDMM.ml3, this file allows the user to select a file/program to upload into the controller.
• cfYYMMDD.ml3, multi-configuration file.
3. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “I” to turn unit power on.
4. The display will display the message “SEt UP”.
5. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
6. The display will read “ruN COnFG”.
7. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until the display reads “SEt tIM”.
8. Press the ENTER key.
9. The display will show the date in YYYY MM-DD format. The day value will be blinking.
10. The date values are modified from right to left. Press the Up or Down Arrow key to increase or decrease the
values. Press the ENTER key to confirm the value for the current field and move to the next value. Press the
CODE SELECT key to modify the previous value.
11. After pressing ENTER to confirm the year value, the time will be displayed in HH MM format with the hours
being in a 24 hour format. The minutes will be blinking.
12. The time values are modified from right to left. Press the Up or Down Arrow key to change the values. Press
the ENTER key to confirm the value for the current field and move to the next value. Press the CODE
SELECT key to modify the previous value.
13. . After pressing ENTER to confirm the hour value, the display will return to “SEt tIM”.
14. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0” to turn power off.
15. Remove the PCMCIA card from the programming slot.
16. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “I” to return the unit to normal operation.

Procedure for Setting the Container ID:

NOTE
The characters will be preset to the container ID already on the controller. If none exist, the default will
be AAAA0000000.

1. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0” to turn power off.

2. Insert the software / programming PCMCIA card into the programming port on the controller (see Figure
7.20). The PCMCIA card will contain the following (example) files:
• menuDDMM.ml3, this file allows the user to select a file/program to upload into the controller.
• cfYYMMDD.ml3, multi-configuration file.

T-370 7–26
 3. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “I” to turn unit power on.
4. The display will display the message “SEt UP”.
5. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
6. The display will read “ruN COnFG”.
7. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until display reads “SEt Id”.
8. Press the ENTER key.
9. The display will show the first letter of the container ID.
10. Press the Up or Down Arrow key to increase or decrease the values. Press ENTER to confirm a value for
the current field and move to the next value. Press CODE SELECT to modify a previous value.
11. When the last value is entered, press the ENTER key to enter the information to the controller. The display
will return to “SEt Id”.
12. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0” to turn power off.
13. Remove the PCMCIA card from the programming slot.
14. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “I” to return the unit to normal operation.
15. To confirm that the correct container ID was loaded, use the keypad to bring up function code Cd40.

7.19.4 Removing and Installing a Module

Removal:
1. Disconnect all front wire harness connectors and move wiring out of way.
2. Remove the VIM module from the right side of the controller.
3. The lower controller mounting is slotted, loosen the top mounting screw and lift up and out. See Figure 7.20.
4. Disconnect the back connectors and remove module.
5. When removing the replacement module from its packaging, note how it is packaged. When returning the
old module for service, place it in the packaging in the same manner as the replacement. The packaging
has been designed to protect the module from both physical and electrostatic discharge damage during
storage and transit.
Installation:
1. Install the module by reversing the removal steps.
2. Torque values for mounting screws are 2.26 Nm (20 in-lb). See Figure 7.20, item 2. Torque value for the
connectors is 1.13 Nm (10 in-lb).

7.19.5 Battery Replacement

Standard Battery Location (Standard Cells):
1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.
2. Slide bracket out and remove old batteries. See Figure 3.5, Item 8.
3. Install new batteries and slide bracket into control box slot.

! CAUTION
Use care when cutting wire ties to avoid nicking or cutting wires.
Standard Battery Location (Rechargeable Cells):
1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.
2. Disconnect battery wire connector from control box.
3. Slide out and remove old battery and bracket. See Figure 3.5, Item 8.
4. Slide new battery pack and bracket into the control box slot.
5. Reconnect battery wire connector to control box and replace wire ties that were removed.

7–27 T-370
Secure Battery Option (Rechargeable Cells Only):
1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.
2. Open control box door and remove both the high voltage shield and clear plastic rain shield (if installed).
3. Disconnect the battery wires from the “KA” plug positions 14, 13, 11.
4. Using Driver Bit, Carrier Transicold part number 07-00418-00, remove the 4 screws securing the display
module to the control box. Disconnect the ribbon cable and set the display module aside.

NOTICE
The battery wires must face toward the right.
5. Remove the old battery from the bracket and clean bracket surface. Remove the protective backing from the
new battery and assemble to the bracket. Secure battery by inserting the wire tie from the back of the
bracket around the battery, and back through the bracket.
6. Reconnect the ribbon cable to display and re-install the display.
7. Route the battery wires from the battery along the display harness and connect the red battery wire and one
end of the red jumper to “KA14,” the other end of the red jumper wire to “KA11,” and the black wire to “KA13.”
8. Replace wire ties that were removed.

7.20 Variable Frequency Drive

7.20.1 Remove and Replace Variable Frequency Drive Cooling Fan
VFD Fan Removal:
1. Turn unit off and disconnect power cord.
2. Remove the (8) screws that secure the VFD cover and remove the cover.
3. The VFD cooling fan is located on the right side of the VFD. Remove the (4) mounting screws that secure
the fan assembly and grille to the VFD. See Figure 7.21.
Figure 7.21 VFD Fan Screws Figure 7.22 VFD Fan Removal

Wire

4. Remove the grille and fan assembly. While removing, rotate the fan assembly to in order to expose the
wires. See Figure 7.22.
5. Cut the exposed VFD fan wires and remove the fan assembly.
6. Feed the cut wires through the opening at the back of the fan housing, this is where the new fan wires will be
spliced to the existing wires.

VFD Fan Replacement:

1. Feed the new VFD fan wires through the opening at the back of the fan housing.
2. Butt splice and heat shrink the new fan wires and the existing wires.

T-370 7–28
 3. Rotate the fan assembly and place it back into the fan housing so that the wires are located on top and
completely tucked in behind the fan housing.
4. Place the grille over the fan and secure the fan assembly and grille with the (4) mounting screws.
5. Replace the VFD cover and secure in place with the (8) mounting screws.
6. Restore power to the unit and check the operation of the VFD fan.

7.20.2 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Bypass

! CAUTION
Variable Frequency Drive Electrical Hazard. After disconnecting from power supply, wait seven
(7) minutes before servicing to allow capacitors to completely discharge.

If the VFD fails, the following procedure will bypass VFD control allowing the compressor to operate at one speed.
This will restore limited unit functionality until the VFD can be repaired or replaced.
1. Turn the unit off and disconnect the power cord.
2. Wait a minimum of 7 minutes before servicing the VFD.
3. Remove the (8) screws that secure the VFD cover and remove the cover. The VFD Phase wiring will be
visible in the lower right corner of the box. See Figure 7.23.
Figure 7.23 VFD Phase Wiring

VFU
VFW

VFV

L3

L2

L1

Clamps

4. Remove wire harness clamps to allow wires to be worked on.

7–29 T-370
 5. Disconnect the VFD input and output phase wires, leaving the ground wire attached.

Output Power

Input Power

6. Cut the barrels off of the wires using wire cutters and strip back the insulation approximately 0.25”
(6.35mm).

7. Locate the following wires to prepare for a butt splice connection.

L1 VFU-CP1

L2 VFW-CP2

L3 VFV-CP3

8. Position the heat shrink and crimp the electrical splice connector for all 6 wires mentioned above.

T-370 7–30
9. Locate the following wires to prepare for a two-to-one butt splice electrical connection.

VFV-CP5
VFW-CP4

VFU-CP6

10. Using a hot air gun, shrink the heat shrink tube to insulate all of the electrical butt splice joints.

11. While heating the heat shrink tube for a two-to-one butt splice electrical connection, use a needle-nosed
plier to crimp the heat shrink tube while heating.

The finished wires should look like the image below:

7–31 T-370
 12. Install wire harness clamps and secure the wires using best practice to prevent damage.
13. Be sure that all the wires are within the VFD and replace the cover and secure with the eight (8) screws.
14. Power up the unit and go to Cd61 to activate the VFD Bypass mode.
15. While Cd61 is visible on the display, press and hold the ALT key for 2 seconds, then press ENTER with the
ALT key still held down. This will lock the code. Press an arrow key to change from ‘OFF’ to ‘Act iV’ and
press ENTER. Press ENTER a second time to lock and activate the limp home mode. Power cycle the unit
to engage limp home mode. To unlock or reset to normal operation the same procedure must be followed.
Cd61 will remain on the display until a valid selection is made, or is manually exited. If the state of limp
home mode is modified, Cd61 will restart the unit after a 30 second hold off.

7.21 Vent Position Sensor Service

7.21.1 Upper VPS Service
The fresh air vent position sensor alarm (AL50) will occur if the sensor reading is not stable for four minutes or if the
sensor is outside of its valid range (shorted or open). This can occur if the vent is loose or the panel is defective. To
confirm a defective panel, assure that the wing nut is secure and then power cycle the unit. If the alarm immediately
reappears as active, the panel should be replaced.
The alarm should immediately go inactive, check the 4-minute stability requirement. If the alarm reoccurs after the
four minutes and the panel was known to have been stable, then the sensor should be replaced. In order to replace
the Upper VPS, the panel must be removed and replaced with another upper fresh air panel equipped with VPS. If
sensor is found to be defective then replace the panel or replace the VPS with kit number 74-66615-00.
Upon installation, a new Vent Position Sensor assembly requires calibration as follows:
1. Rotate the vent to the 0 CMH/ CFM position. Cd45 will automatically display.
2. Press the Enter key and hold for five seconds. After the enter key has been pressed the display will read
“CAL” (for calibration).
3. Press the ALT MODE key and hold for five seconds. After the calibration has been completed, Cd45 will
display 0 CMH / CFM.

7.22 Temperature Sensor Service

Service procedures for the return recorder (RRS), return temperature (RTS), supply recorder (SRS), supply
temperature (STS), ambient temperature (AMBS), defrost temperature (DTS), evaporator temperature (ETS), and
compressor discharge temperature (CPDS) sensors are provided here.

7.22.1 Ice Bath Preparation

The ice-water bath is a method for testing the accuracy of sensors by submerging the sensors in an insulated
container with ice cubes or chipped ice, then filling voids between ice with water and agitating until the mixture
reaches 0°C (32°F) measured on a laboratory thermometer.
Notes:
• Wherever possible, use a thermometer that is regularly calibrated by an accredited test lab. Contact your
instrument representative if the reference thermometer is not showing correct readings.
• Always use a temperature measurement reference instrument which is of higher accuracy than the device
checked – for example, a thermometer with a rated accuracy of +/- 0.2 °C should be used to check a device
with a rated accuracy +/- 0.3 °C.
• A thermally insulated container, tub open to atmosphere and large enough to contain crushed ice and water
should be used. The tub should be large enough to contain the unit’s sensor and the reference thermometer.
• Enough distilled water should be available to make ice cubes and to set up a proper and stable ice-water
triple-point mixture. Prepare ice using distilled water.
• Pre-cool distilled water for testing.

T-370 7–32
Procedure:
1. Prepare a mixture of clean ice using distilled water in a clean insulated container. If possible, the person
handling should be wearing latex gloves.
a. Crush or chip the ice to completely fill the container. The finer the ice particles, the more accurate the
mixture.
b. Add enough pre-cooled distilled water to fill the container.
c. Stir the mixture for a minimum of 2 minutes to ensure water is completely cooled and good mixing has
occurred.
d. The mixture should generally contain about 85% ice with the distilled water occupying the rest of the
space.
e. Add more ice as the ice melts.
2. Stir the ice water slurry mixture to maintain a temperature of 0°C (32°F).
3. Constantly monitor the temperature of the ice water slurry with your reference thermometer. Ensure that the
temperature of the bath has stabilized. The criterion for stability generally is to take two readings at 1 minute
intervals, and the two readings should be 0°C (32°F).

7.22.2 Sensor Checkout Procedure

This procedure is performed to verify the accuracy of a temperature sensor.
1. Remove the sensor and place it in a 0°C (32°F) ice-water bath. Refer to Ice Bath Preparation procedure.
2. Start the unit and check the sensor reading on the control panel. The reading should be 0°C (32°F). If the
reading is correct, reinstall the sensor; if it’s not, continue with the next step.
3. Turn the unit OFF and disconnect the power supply.
4. Remove the controller to gain access to the sensor plugs. See Section 7.19.
5. Using the plug connector marked “EC” that is connected to the back of the controller, locate the sensor
wires (RRS, RTS, SRS, STS, AMBS, DTS, or CPDS as required). Follow those wires to the connector and
using the pins of the plug, measure the resistance. Values are provided in Table 7–2, Table 7–3.
Due to the variations and inaccuracies in ohmmeters, thermometers or other test equipment, a reading
within 2% of the chart value would indicate a good sensor. If a sensor is defective, the resistance
reading will usually be much higher or lower than the resistance values given.

7–33 T-370
 Table 7–2 Sensor Resistance - AMBS, DTS, ETS, RRS, RTS, SRS, STS
°C °F OHMS °C °F OHMS
-40 -40 336,500 6 42.8 24,173
-39 -38.2 314,773 7 44.6 23,017
-38 -36.4 294,600 8 46.4 21,922
-37 -34.6 275,836 9 48.2 20,886
-36 -32.8 258,336 10 50 19,900
-35 -31 242,850 11 51.8 18,975
-34 -29.2 228,382 12 53.6 18,093
-33 -27.4 214,164 13 55.4 17,258
-32 -25.6 200,909 14 57.2 16,466
-31 -23.8 188,545 15 59 15,715
-30 -22.0 177,000 16 60.8 15,002
-29 -20.2 166,360 17 62.6 14,325
-28 -18.4 156,426 18 64.4 13,683
-27 -16.6 147,148 19 66.2 13,073
-26 -14.8 138,478 20 68 12,494
-25 -13 130,374 21 69.8 11,944
-24 -11.2 122,794 22 71.6 11,420
-23 -9.4 115,702 23 73.4 10,923
-22 -7.6 109,063 24 75.2 10,450
-21 -5.8 102,846 25 77 10,000
-20 -4 97,022 26 78.8 9,572
-19 -2.2 91,563 27 80.6 9,164
-18 -0.4 86,445 28 82.4 8,777
-17 1.4 81,644 29 84.2 8,407
-16 3.2 77,139 30 86 8,055
-15 5 72,910 31 87.8 7,720
-14 6.8 68,938 32 89.6 7,401
-13 8.6 65,206 33 91.4 7,096
-12 10.4 61,699 34 93.2 6,806
-11 12.2 58,401 35 95 6,529
-10 14 55,330 36 96.8 6,265
-9 15.8 52,381 37 98.6 6,013
-8 17.6 49,634 38 100.4 5,772
-7 19.4 47,047 39 102.2 5,543
-6 21.2 44,610 40 104.0 5,323
-5 23 42,314 41 105.8 5,114
-4 24.8 40,149 42 107.6 4,914
-3 26.6 38,108 43 109.4 4,723
-2 28.4 36,182 44 111.2 4,540
-1 30.2 34,365 45 113 4,365
0 32 32,650 46 114.8 4,198
1 33.8 31,030 47 116.6 4,038
2 35.6 29,500 48 118.4 3,885
3 37.4 28,054 49 120.2 3,739
4 39.2 26,688 50 122 3,599
5 41 25,396

T-370 7–34
 Table 7–3 Sensor Resistance - CPDS
°C °F OHMS °C °F OHMS
-40 -40 849,822 18 64.4 136,705
-38 -36.4 834,450 20 68.0 124,876
-36 -32.8 819,079 22 71.6 114,101
-34 -29.2 803,707 24 75.2 104,352
-32 -25.6 788,336 25 77 100,000
-30 -22.0 772,964 26 78.8 95,585
-28 -18.4 757,593 28 82.4 87,619
-26 -14.8 742,221 30 83.0 80,447
-24 -11.2 726,849 32 89.6 73,931
-22 -7.6 711,478 34 93.2 68,000
-20 -4.0 696,106 36 96.8 62,599
-18 -0.4 680,735 38 100.4 57,657
-16 3.2 665,363 40 104.0 53,200
-14 6.8 649,992 42 107.6 49,117
-12 10.4 620,224 44 111.2 45,367
-10 14.0 563,722 46 114.8 41,965
-8 17.6 507,219 48 118.4 38,840
-6 21.2 450,717 50 122.0 35,991
-4 24.8 403,140 52 125.6 33,369
-2 28.4 365,427 54 129.2 30,967
0 32.0 327,715 56 132.8 28,753
2 35.6 295,834 58 136.4 26,733
4 39.2 267,922 60 140.0 24,867
6 42.8 241,618 62 143.6 23,152
8 46.4 219,659 64 147.2 21,570
10 50.0 198,927 66 150.8 20,827
12 53.6 180,987 68 154.4 20,112
14 57.2 164,687 70 158.0 18,768
16 60.8 149,680 72 161.6 16,375

7.22.3 GDP Supply and Return Sensor Calibration

European Commission GDP (Good Distribution Practices) guidelines, which are used worldwide, call for the
equipment used to control or monitor environments where medicinal products are stored or transported be
calibrated in accordance with pharmaceutical shipper specifications, typically every six months or annually.

This procedure explains how to perform a GDP calibration of the supply (STS/SRS) and return (RTS/RRS) sensors
using DataLINE software version 3.1 or higher. The calibration procedure should be conducted in pairs (STS/SRS,
or RTS/RRS) and it is recommended to calibrate before the full pre-trip inspection.

7–35 T-370
 ! WARNING
Before removing the Supply or Return air sensors from the unit, turn the ON/OFF switch and circuit
breaker to the OFF position. Disconnect the power plug from the unit. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power cannot inadvertently be energized. It is important that all
dismantling work is done and tools and personnel are away from the unit before powering on the
unit for calibration.

! WARNING
When performing the Return Air Sensor calibration, disconnect both evaporator motors.

NOTE
Before proceeding with the calibration procedure, ensure that controller software version is up to date
(57xx) and DataLINE version 3.1 or higher is installed onto the download device. Only the latest
DataLINE and controller software will allow users to carry out Good Distribution Practice (GDP)
calibration. Do not downgrade the software after installing the latest software.

NOTE
Before proceeding with the calibration procedure, it is recommended to check the sensors by running
pre-trip P5-0. This test checks the sensor values. If the test fails, identify and correct the faulty sensor
and rerun the test.

Tools Required:
• Socket screwdrivers set
• Phillips screwdriver
• Standard hand tools
• Interrogator cable
• Laptop with DataLINE 3.1 or above installed
• Clean insulated container for distilled water and ice
• A regularly calibrated reference thermometer, recommended to be of accuracy up to 2 decimal places

GDP Calibration, Removing Supply Sensors (STS/SRS) from Unit:

1. Locate the supply sensors cover assembly on the suction side of the compressor. Remove the two
fasteners securing the cover of the sensors.
2. Remove the cover and rotate the supply air sensors, STS/SRS, in a clockwise direction and remove the
sensors from the sensor housing.

GDP Calibration, Removing Return Sensors (RTS/RRS) from Unit:

1. Remove both front access panels from the unit by removing 8 fasteners from each panel. Save all hardware
for re-installation.
2. On the right side, disconnect the fan motor wiring, loosen the fastener and remove (slide) the evaporator
motor from the unit.
3. Loosen the fastener on the sensor bracket.
4. Cut all wire ties that are securing the sensors to the harness and remove sensor.

GDP Calibration, Perform Calibration:

1. Connect the interrogator cable to the interrogator port. Then, power on the unit.

T-370 7–36
 ! WARNING
Before powering on the unit, it is important to ensure that all dismantling work is done and tools are
away and service personnel are not working on the unit at the time of power on.
2. Open DataLINE version 3.1 or above. From the DataLINE launch pad, click on the Probe Calibration button
to go to the Probe Calibration screen. A pop-up window will appear reminding the user to ensure proper ice
bath temperature. Click OK to acknowledge.

Figure 7.24 DataLINE - Probe Calibration

3. On the Probe Calibration screen, click on the Calibrate Supply sensors or Calibrate Return sensors button.

Figure 7.25 DataLINE - Calibrate Sensors Button

4. A Location of Service pop-up window will appear. In the appropriate fields, enter the Service Center Name
and Service Center Location where the calibration is being performed. Then, click the Save button. A pop-
up window will appear reminding the user to ensure proper ice bath temperature. Click OK to acknowledge
and remember to maintain the Ice bath at 0°C (32°F).

7–37 T-370
 Figure 7.26 DataLINE - Enter Service Information

5. Prepare the ice bath. Refer to the Ice Bath Preparation procedure.
Ensure that the set-up (i.e. ice bath, sensors, reference thermometer) has reached a stable state before
beginning the calibration process. Ensure that the set-up is clean and the reference thermometer is
regularly maintained and calibrated.
6. Place the ice bath in a location near sensors. For Return Sensors, place the ice bath on an elevated
platform (ladder) of appropriate height.

Figure 7.27 Ice Bath

7. Once temperature stability is ensured, submerge the sensors in the ice water slurry. Make certain that the
sensors do not contact the container sides or bottom, or each other. Continuously stir the slurry mixture
during calibration.
8. Ensure that the Ice bath is at 0°C (32°F) using the calibrated reference thermometer. Confirm that the
sensor readings have stabilized and the sensors are within +/- 0.3°C (0.5°F). The readings can be taken
from the Uncal column in the Current Probe Offset Temperatures table.
9. Then, after confirming the sensor readings have stabilized, click on the Start Cal button. After clicking Start
Cal, the process begins automatically and will complete in less than 5 minutes. Continue to stir the ice bath
during testing. Calibration will fail if the stability cannot be achieved or the sensor offset is greater than 0.3°C
(0.5°F).

T-370 7–38
 Figure 7.28 DataLINE - Start Cal Button

10. Once the calibration has completed, a pop-up will appear with the message Calibrate Complete. Click OK to
acknowledge and the results will then be displayed on the screen in the Results column.
Calibration will fail if the stability cannot be achieved or the sensor offset is greater than 0.3°C (0.5°F).
The validity of a sensor can be checked by hand warming the sensors to see if there are changes in the
readings on the DataLINE screen. If calibration will not complete, replace and recalibrate the sensors.
Refer to the Sensor Replacement procedure.

Figure 7.29 DataLINE - Calibration Results

11. After completing the calibration event, download a DCX file and check that all of the following information is
captured: service center name, location, the results of the calibration and the offset applied. Ensure that all
the information is captured and the event is considered a success when all the intended sensors in
calibration have passed.

NOTE
If there is “uncal” in the download, it means that the calibration process was not completed.

12. After the completion of the calibration, restore the unit to its original state.

7–39 T-370
7.22.4 Sensor Replacement
1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.

NOTICE
Include white date code label when cutting out and removing defective sensors. The label
could be required for warranty returns.

2. Cut cable. Slide the cap and grommet off a bulb type sensor and save for reuse. Do not cut the grommet.
3. Cut one wire of existing cable 40 mm (1-1/2 inches) shorter than the other wire.
4. Cut replacement sensor wires (opposite colors) back 40 mm (1-1/2 inches). See Figure 7.30.
5. Strip back insulation on all wiring 6.3 mm (1/4 inch).

Figure 7.30 Sensor Types

40 mm (1 1/2 in),
Sensor 2 or 3 wires as required

6.3 mm (1/4 in) Sensor 6.3 mm (1/4 in)

Mounting Stud Type Bulb Type

6. Slide a large piece of heat shrink tubing over the cable, and place the two small pieces of heat shrink tubing,
one over each wire, before adding crimp fittings as shown in Figure 7.31.

Figure 7.31 Sensor and Cable Splice

3 4

1) Sensor (typical) 3) Cable

2) Large Heat Shrink Tubing (1) 4) Heat Shrink Tubing (2 or 3 as required)
-----
7. If required, slide the cap and grommet assembly onto the replacement sensor.
8. Slip crimp fittings over dressed wires (keeping wire colors together). Make sure wires are pushed into crimp
fittings as far as possible and crimp with crimping tool.
9. Solder spliced wires with a 60% tin and 40% lead Rosincore solder.
10. Slide heat shrink tubing over each splice so that ends of tubing cover both ends of crimp as shown in Figure
7.30.
11. Heat tubing to shrink over splice. Make sure all seams are sealed tightly against wiring to prevent moisture
seepage.

! CAUTION
Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice area as this may affect the sensor resistance.

T-370 7–40
 12. Slide large heat shrink tubing over both splices and shrink.
13. Position the sensor in unit as shown in Figure 7.31 and re-check sensor resistance.
14. Reinstall the sensor. See Section 7.22.5.

NOTICE
The P5 Pre-Trip test must be run to inactivate probe alarms. See Section 5.8.

7.22.5 Sensor STS and SRS Re-Installation

To properly position a supply sensor, the sensor must be fully inserted into the probe holder. See Figure 7.32. Do not
allow heat shrink covering to contact the probe holder. For proper placement of the sensor, be sure to position the
enlarged positioning section of the sensor against the side of the mounting clamp. This positioning will give the
sensor the optimum amount of exposure to the supply air stream, and will allow the controller to operate correctly.

Figure 7.32 Supply Sensor Positioning

1
4

6
3

6 mm (1/4 inch)

1) Sensor Wires 4) Evaporator Back Panel

2) Cap and Grommet Assembly 5) Supply Sensor
3) Probe Holder 6) Supply Air Stream
-----

7.22.6 Sensors RRS and RTS Re-Installation

Reinstall the return sensor as shown in Figure 7.33. For proper placement of the return sensor, be sure to position
the enlarged positioning section of the sensor against the side of the mounting clamp.

7–41 T-370
 Figure 7.33 Return Sensor Positioning

1
2 1.50 in.
(38.1cm)

1) Mounting Clamp 2) Return Sensor

-----

7.22.7 Sensor DTS Re-Installation

The DTS sensor must be installed with the long, flat edge against the coil center tube sheet in order to accurately
measure the coil temperature.

7.22.8 Sensors ETS1 Re-Installation

The ETS1 sensor is located in a tube holder under insulation, as shown in Figure 7.34. When the combo sensor is
removed and reinstalled, it must be placed in a tube holder by applying thermal grease. Insulating material must
completely cover the sensor to ensure the correct temperature is sensed.

Figure 7.34 Evaporator Temperature Sensor Positioning

1.00 in.
(25.4cm)

7.22.9 Sensor, CPDS Re-Installation

To replace the Compressor Discharge Sensor perform the following:

1. Ensure the unit is disconnected from the power source and that ST is in OFF position.
2. Remove the existing sensor. Clean all silicone sealer and dielectric compound from the sensor well. Ensure
well is clean and dry. Top of compressor, where the sensor seals, must also be clean and dry.
3. Using the syringe supplied with the replacement sensor, squeeze all of the dielectric compound into the
sensor well.
4. Place a bead of the silicone sealer supplied with the replacement sensor around the sensor sealing ring.
Insert sensor into the well with the leads parallel to the suction fitting.
5. Reconnect sensor and run a Pre-trip to test. See Figure 7.30.

7.23 Transducer Service

The location of the Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT), Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT), and Flash Tank
Pressure Transducer (FPT) can be found in Figure 3.3 and Figure 3.4.
Remove and replace transducers using the following procedure:

T-370 7–42
 1. Remove the refrigerant charge from the unit. See Section 7.2.5.
2. Disconnect wiring from defective transducer.

NOTICE
When removing or installing a transducer from the unit, always use a deep well socket or box
end wrench to prevent crushing of the transducer. Never use an open end wrench (see Figure
7.35). Using an open end wrench will concentrate pressure on only two sides of the transducer
housing which can potentially crush the transducer.

Figure 7.35 Open End Wrench

Do NOT Use
Open End!

3. Using a deep well socket or box end wrench, turn the transducer assembly counterclockwise to loosen and
remove the defective transducer.
4. Using a deep well socket or box end wrench, install the new transducer. The torque values for each
transducer are listed below:
• SPT: 25.7-28.5 Nm (19-21 ft-lb)
• DPT and FPT: 9.5-12.2 Nm (7-8 ft-lb)
5. Reconnect the wiring to the new Transducer.
6. Evacuate and dehydrate the system. See Section 7.2.7.
7. Recharge the system. See Section 7.2.8.
8. Start the unit, verify refrigeration charge. See Section 3.6.

7.24 Communications Interface Module Installation

Units that have been factory provisioned for installation of a communication interface module (CIM) have the required
wiring installed. If the unit is not factory provisioned, a provision wiring kit (Carrier Transicold part number 76-00685-
00) must be installed. Installation instructions are packaged with the kit. To install the module, do the following:

! WARNING
Installation requires wiring to the main unit circuit breaker, CB-1. Make sure the power to the unit is
off and power plug disconnected before beginning installation.
1. CB-1 is connected to the power system, see wiring schematic. Ensure that the unit power is off AND that the
unit power plug is disconnected.
2. Open control box and remove low voltage shield. See Figure 7.36. Open the high voltage shield.
3. If using factory provisioned wiring, remove the circuit breaker panel, with circuit breaker, from the control
box. Locate, wires CB21/CIA3, CB22/CIA5 and CB23/CIA7 that have been tied back in the wire harness.
Remove the protective heat shrink from the ends of the wires.
4. Refit the circuit breaker panel.
5. Fit the new CIM into the unit.
6. Attach three wires CB21/CIA3, CB22/CIA5 and CB23/CIA7 to the CIM at connection CIA.
7. Locate connectors CIA and CIB, remove plugs if required, and attach to the module.
8. Replace the low voltage shield.

7–43 T-370
 Figure 7.36 Communications Interface Installation

1 2

1) Circuit Breaker (CB1) 2) Communications Interface Module

-----

7.25 Maintenance Of Painted Surfaces

The refrigeration unit is protected by a special paint system against the corrosive atmosphere in which it normally
operates. However, should the paint system be damaged, the base metal can corrode. In order to protect the
refrigeration unit from the highly corrosive sea atmosphere, or if the protective paint system is scratched or
damaged, clean area to bare metal using a wire brush, emery paper or equivalent cleaning method. Immediately
following cleaning, apply two-part epoxy paint to the area. and allow to dry. After the first coat dries, apply a second
coat.

7.26 Temperature / Pressure Chart

Table 7–4 R-744 Temperature - Pressure Chart

Temp Pressure Temp Pressure
°F °C psig °C °F bar
-40 -40.0 131.0 -40 -40.0 9.05
-38 -38.9 137.0 -39 -38.2 9.42
-36 -37.8 143.3 -38 -36.4 9.81
-34 -36.7 149.7 -37 -34.6 10.20
-32 -35.6 156.3 -36 -32.8 10.61
-30 -34.4 163.1 -35 -31.0 11.02
-28 -33.3 170.1 -34 -29.2 11.45
-26 -32.2 177.3 -33 -27.4 11.89
-24 -31.1 184.8 -32 -25.6 12.34
-22 -30.0 192.4 -31 -23.8 12.80
-20 -28.9 200.2 -30 -22.0 13.28

T-370 7–44
 Table 7–4 R-744 Temperature - Pressure Chart
Temp Pressure Temp Pressure
°F °C psig °C °F bar
-18 -27.8 208.3 -29 -20.2 13.76
-16 -26.7 216.5 -28 -18.4 14.26
-14 -25.6 225.0 -27 -16.6 14.77
-12 -24.4 233.8 -26 -14.8 15.29
-10 -23.3 242.7 -25 -13.0 15.83
-8 -22.2 251.9 -24 -11.2 16.38
-6 -21.1 261.3 -23 -9.4 16.94
-4 -20.0 271.0 -22 -7.6 17.51
-2 -18.9 280.9 -21 -5.8 18.10
0 -17.8 291.0 -20 -4.0 18.70
2 -16.7 301.5 -19 -2.2 19.31
4 -15.6 312.1 -18 -0.4 19.94
6 -14.4 323.1 -17 1.4 20.58
8 -13.3 334.2 -16 3.2 21.24
10 -12.2 345.7 -15 5.0 21.91
12 -11.1 357.4 -14 6.8 22.59
14 -10.0 369.5 -13 8.6 23.29
16 -8.9 381.8 -12 10.4 24.01
18 -7.8 394.3 -11 12.2 24.74
20 -6.7 407.2 -10 14.0 25.49
22 -5.6 420.4 -9 15.8 26.25
24 -4.4 433.8 -8 17.6 27.03
26 -3.3 447.6 -7 19.4 27.82
28 -2.2 461.7 -6 21.2 28.63
30 -1.1 476.1 -5 23.0 29.46
32 0.0 490.8 -4 24.8 30.30
34 1.1 505.8 -3 26.6 31.16
36 2.2 521.2 -2 28.4 32.04
38 3.3 536.9 -1 30.2 32.94
40 4.4 552.9 0 32.0 33.85
42 5.6 569.3 1 33.8 34.78
44 6.7 586.0 2 35.6 35.73
46 7.8 603.1 3 37.4 36.70
48 8.9 620.5 4 39.2 37.69
50 10.0 638.3 5 41.0 38.70
52 11.1 656.5 6 42.8 39.72
54 12.2 675.0 7 44.6 40.77
56 13.3 694.0 8 46.4 41.83
58 14.4 713.3 9 48.2 42.92

7–45 T-370
 Table 7–4 R-744 Temperature - Pressure Chart
Temp Pressure Temp Pressure
°F °C psig °C °F bar
60 15.6 733.1 10 50.0 44.02
62 16.7 753.2 11 51.8 45.15
64 17.8 773.8 12 53.6 46.30
66 18.9 794.8 13 55.4 47.47
68 20.0 816.2 14 57.2 48.66
70 21.1 838.1 15 59.0 49.87
72 22.2 860.5 16 60.8 51.11
74 23.3 883.3 17 62.6 52.37
76 24.4 906.7 18 64.4 53.65
78 25.6 930.5 19 66.2 54.96
80 26.7 954.9 20 68.0 56.29
82 27.8 979.8 21 69.8 57.65
84 28.9 1005.4 22 71.6 59.03
86 30.0 1031.6 23 73.4 60.44
88 31.1 ** 24 75.2 61.88
25 77.0 63.34
26 78.8 64.84
27 80.6 66.36
28 82.4 67.92
29 84.2 69.51
30 86.0 71.14
31 87.8 71.80
32 89.6 ****
** 87.8°F is the Critical point of CO2, Pressure 1056.2psig. Distinct liquid and vapor states do not exist.
**** 31.1°C is the Critical point of CO2, Pressure 72.82Bar. Distinct liquid and vapor states do not exist.

T-370 7–46
7.27 Bolt Torque Values
Table 7–5 Recommended Bolt Torque Values (Dry, Non-Lubricated for 18-8 Stainless Steel)
Bolt Diameter Threads In-Lb Ft-Lb Nm
Free Spinning
#4 40 5.2 0.4 0.6
#6 32 9.6 0.8 1.1
#8 32 20 1.7 2.3
#10 24 23 1.9 2.6
1/4 20 75 6.3 8.5
5/16 18 132 11 14.9
3/8 16 240 20 27.1
7/16 14 372 31 42
1/2 13 516 43 58.3
9/16 12 684 57 77.3
5/8 11 1104 92 124.7
3/4 10 1488 124 168.1
Non Free Spinning (Locknuts etc.)
1/4 20 82.5 6.9 9.3
5/16 18 145.2 12.1 16.4
3/8 16 264 22.0 29.8
7/16 14 409.2 34.1 46.2
1/2 13 567.6 47.3 64.1
9/16 12 752.4 62.7 85
5/8 11 1214.4 101.2 137.2
3/4 10 1636.8 136.4 184.9

7–47 T-370
 SECTION 8
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATIC AND DIAGRAMS
Figure 8.1 Schematic Legend

8–1 T-370
 Figure 8.2 Schematic Diagram - Standard Unit Configuration

T-370 8–2
Figure 8.3 Unit Wiring Diagram - Standard Unit Configuration Sheet 1 of 2

8–3 T-370
 Figure 8.4 Unit Wiring Diagram -Standard Unit Configuration - Sheet 2 of 2

T-370 8–4
 SECTION 9
EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

Serial Number / Seriennummer / Serienummer:

__________________ - __________________
Manufacturing Date/ Herstellungsdatum / Fremstillingsdato:
__________________

EU Declaration of Conformity
EU-Konformitätserklärung / EU Overensstemmelseserklæring

We, manufacturer: Carrier Transicold Pte Ltd

Wir, der Hersteller / Vi, fabrikant: 251 Jalan Ahmad Ibrahim
Singapore 629146

Declare, under our sole responsibility, that the NaturaLINE Container Unit:
Erklären, eigenverantwortlich, dass die NaturaLINE Container-Einheit / Erklærer, som eneansvarlige, at Natu-
raLINE Container enhed:

Models (Modelle / Modellerne): 69NT40-601 - 100 to (bis / til) 199

are in conformity with the provisions of the following European Directives:

in Übereinstimmung mit den Bestimmungen der folgenden europäischen Richtlinien ist /er i overensstemmelse
med bestemmelserne i følgende europæiske direktiver:

• Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC following Annex VIII

Maschinenrichtlinie 2006/42/EC, folgender Anhang VIII / Maskindirektiv 2006/42/EF, tillæg VIII
• Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2014/30/EU following Annex II
Richtlinie zur elektromagnetischen Verträglichkeit 2014/30/EU, folgender Anhang II / Elektromagnetisk Kom-
patibilitetsdirektiv 2014/30/EU, tillæg II
• Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU following Module A2.
Druckgeräte-Richtlinie (PED) 2014/68/EU, folgendes Modul A2./ Direktiv 2014/68/EU, Modul A2 om tryk-
bærende udstyr.
• PED Notified Body / PED Dafür benannte Stelle / bemyndigende organ:
Bureau Veritas Services SAS nr 0062 8 Cours du Triangle, 92800 Puteaux, France
Certification Number / Zertifizierungsnummer / Certificeringsnummer: CE-0062-PED-A2-CPG001-20-
SGP-Rev-B
• Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU Annex II (with select options)
Funkanlagenrichtlinie (RED) 2014/53/EU Anhang II / Radio udstyrs direktiv 2014/53/EU, tillæg II (med valg-
muligheder)

This PED assembly contains the following equipment which was subject to its own CE Marking:
Diese PED-Baugruppe enthält die folgenden Geräte, die ihrer eigenen CE-Kennzeichnung unterliegen / Denne
PED-montering indeholder følgende udstyr, der er underkastet egen CE-mærkning:

Component Conformity Procedure

Komponente / Komponent Konformitätsverfahren / Overensstem-
melsesprocedure

Flash Tank / Entspanner / Ekspansionstank Module A2 / Modul A2

Pressure Relief Valves / Ueberdruckventil / Overtryksventiler Module A2 / Modul A2
High Pressure Switch / Hochdruckschalter / Højtrykskontakt Module B+D / Modul B + D

9–1 T-370
 The following Harmonized Standards were applied for this equipment:
Folgende harmonisierte Normen wurden für diese Geräte angewendet/ Følgende harmoniserede standarder
blev anvendt til dette udstyr:
Machinery Directive EMC Directive RED Directive / RED Richtlinie PED Directive
Maschinenrichtlinie / EMV Richtlinie / EMC (with select options / Mit bestimmten Aus- Druckgeräte-Richt-
Maskindirektiv direktiv wahlmoeglichkeiten // med valgmuligheder) linie / PED-direktiv
EN ISO 12100:2010 EN 61000-6-4:2007 EN/IEC 60950:2011, EN 62311:2008 EN 378-2:2016
EN 60204-1:2006 EN 61000-6-2:2005 EN 300 328 v2.1.1, EN 300 440 v2.1.1
EN 13857:2008 EN 55011:2009 EN 301 511 v12.5.1, EN 301 908-1 v11.1.1
EN 301 489-1 v2.1.1, EN 301 489-3 v2.1.1
EN 301 489-17 v3.1.1, EN 301 489-52 v1.1.0

The following technical standard was applied for this equipment / Folgende technische Norm wurde für diese
Geräte angewendet// Følgende Tekniske standarder blev anvendt til dette udstyr: ISO 1496-2:2008

Person established in Europe authorized to compile a copy of the Technical File:

In Europa ansässige Person, die berechtigt ist, eine Kopie der technischen Dokumentation zu erstellen/ Ansvarlig
person i Europa udpeget til at udarbejde en kopi af den tekniske fil:

Shaun Bretherton
Service Engineering Manager of CTL Rotterdam
Pittsburgstraat 21 3047 BL Rotterdam, Netherlands

Nader Awwad, Engineering Director

Carrier Transicold
P.O. Box 4805
Syracuse, New York 13221, USA
(Authorized person to sign declaration on behalf of the manufacturer)
(Person, die zur Unterzeichnung der Erklärung im Namen des Herstellers berechtigt ist / Bemyndiget person skal
underskrive på vejne af fabrikanten)

Carrier Transicold Division, Carrier Corporation Part no. / Teilenr: 62-10144-114 Rev F
P.O. Box 4805 Syracuse, New York 13221 USA English / Deutsch / Dansk
 China RoHS per SJ/T 11364-2014

产品中有害物质的名称及含量
有害物质
铅 汞 镉 六价铬 多溴联苯 多溴二苯醚
部件名称 (Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr (VI)) (PBB) (PBDE)
金属板部件 O O O O O O
塑料部件 O O O O O O
盘管组件 X O O O O O
加热部件 O O O O O O
马达，压缩机与风扇组件 O O O O O O
温度控制微处理器系统 X O O O O O
断路器与接触器 O O O O O O
变压器 O O O O O O
传感器 X O O O O O
通讯组件 O O O O O O
阀组件 X O O O O O
电缆线/电源 O O O O O O
电池 O O X O O O
标签与绝缘材料 O O O O O O
玻璃部件 X O O O O O
本表格依据 SJ/T 11364 的规定编制。
O：表示该有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在 GB/T 26572 规定的限量要求以下。
X：表示该有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出 GB/T 26572 规定的限量要求。
62-66122-00, Rev A

T-370
 INDEX

A Controller Function Codes (Cd) 4–26

Controller Microprocessor Malfunction 6–4
Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS) Location 3–1
Controller Module Remove and Install 7–27
Auto Test Operation from Keypad 4–12 Controller Operational Overview 4–3
Auto Test Operation from Serial Communications 4–13 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes 4–47
Automatic Cold Treatment (ACT) Cd51 4–22 Controller Programming Procedure 7–25
Automatic Cold Treatment Procedure 4–22 Controller Sequence and Modes of Operation 4–4
Automatic Setpoint Change (ASC) Cd53 4–23 Controller Service 7–23
Controller Software Description 4–4
B Controller Troubleshooting 7–24
Back Panels 2–4
Battery 2–4 D
Data, Electrical System 3–10
C Data, Refrigeration 3–8
Cable Restraint 2–4 DataBANK Card 4–17
Cargo Probe Receptacle Location 3–2 DataCORDER Alarm Configuration (dCF07 − dCF10) 4–
Circuit Breaker (CB-1) Electrical Data 3–10 16
Circuit Breaker (CB-1) Location 3–7 DataCORDER Alarms (dAL) 4–18
Communications Interface Module Description 2–4 DataCORDER Communications 4–17
Communications Interface Module Installation 7–43 DataCORDER Configuration Variables (dCF) 4–16
Communications Interface Module Location 3–7 DataCORDER Description 4–13
Compressor Approved Oil 3–8 DataCORDER Function Codes (dC) 4–52
Compressor Contactor (CH) 4–8 DataCORDER ISO Trip Header 4–19
Compressor Description 2–3 DataCORDER Logging Interval (dCF03) 4–15
Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor (CPDS) Lo- DataCORDER Power Up 4–17
cation 3–3, 3–4 DataCORDER Pre-Trip Data Recording 4–17
Compressor High Temperature / Low Pressure Protec- DataCORDER Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06) 4–15
tion 4–11 DataCORDER Sensor Configuration (dCF02) 4–14
Compressor Internal Protector (IP) 4–11 DataCORDER Sensor Configuration Generic Mode 4–
Compressor Location 3–1 15
Compressor Motor Electrical Data 3–10 DataCORDER Sensor Configuration Standard Mode 4–
Compressor Oil Charge 3–8 14
Compressor Oil Sight Glass 3–8 DataCORDER Software 4–14
Compressor Refrigeration System Data 3–8 DataCORDER Standard Variables 4–16
Compressor Remove and Replace 7–8 DataCORDER Thermistor Format (dCF04) 4–15
Compressor Section Components 3–3 DataCORDER USDA Cold Treatment 4–19
Compressor Service 7–8 DataLINE Software 4–17
Compressor Weight (With Oil) 3–8 Defrost Operation 4–9
Configuration Identification 2–1 Defrost Overview 4–9
Connect Power 5–1 Defrost Related Settings 4–10
Connecting Remote Monitoring Receptacle 5–3 Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) Failure 4–10
Connecting To 380/460 VAC Power 5–1 Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) Location 3–2
Control Box Description 2–3 Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) Operation 4–9
Control Box Location 3–7 Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) Re-installing 7–42
Controller 4–3 Dehumidification 2–4
Controller Alarm Indications (AL) 4–33 Discharge (High) Side Connection 7–1
Controller Alarms Description 4–11 Discharge Pressure Gauge Location 7–1
Controller Battery Replacement 7–27 Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) Location 3–3, 3–
4
Controller Configuration Variables (CnF) 4–4, 4–24
Discharge Pressure Valve Location 7–1
Controller Description 2–1
Display Module 4–1

Index–1 T-370
E Feature Descriptions 2–3
Filter Drier Location 3–1
Economized Mode Overview 3–13
Filter Drier Service 7–13
Economized Mode Refrigeration Circuit 3–12 First Aid 1–1
Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) Coil Remove and Re- First Stage Discharge Port & Suction Port 3–13
place 7–22
Flash Gas 3–13
Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) Economized Mode 3–
13 Flash Tank Component Location 3–1
Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) Electrical Data 3–11 Flash Tank Description 2–3
Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) Frozen Mode Cooling Flash Tank Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Location 3–3,
4–8 3–4
Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) Location 3–3, 3–4 Flash Tank Refrigeration Circuit 3–12
Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) Refrigeration Circuit Flash Tank Remove and Replace 7–22
3–12 Flash Tank Section Components 3–6
Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) Remove and Replace Fresh Air Makeup Vent 3–1
7–22 Fresh Air Makeup Vent Adjustment 5–1
Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) Service 7–21 Fresh Air Makeup Vent Panel Location 3–1
Electrical Data 3–10 Frozen Mode Cooling Sequence of Operation 4–8
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) Location 3–2 Frozen Mode Overview and Temperature Control 4–7
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) Nominal Resistance Fuses 3–11
3–11
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) Operation 3–13 G
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) Refrigeration Circuit
3–12 Gas Cooler / Intercooler Coil 2–3, 7–12
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) Service 7–19 Gas Cooler / Intercooler Coil Cleaning 7–12
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) Stepper Motor 3–13 Gas Cooler / Intercooler Coil Replacement 7–12
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) Superheat 3–8 Gas Cooler / Intercooler Description and Location 3–6
Electronic Leak Detector 7–4 Gas Cooler / Intercooler Fan Motor 4–8
Evacuation and Dehydration 7–4 Gas Cooler / Intercooler Grille 2–4
Evaporator Cleaning 7–18 Gas Cooler Fan And Motor Assembly 7–13
Evaporator Coil and Coil Heaters Location 3–2 Gas Cooler Fan Location 3–1
Evaporator Coil Assembly 7–14 Gas Cooler Fan Motor Electrical Data 3–10
Evaporator Coil Heater Remove and Replace 7–14 Gas Cooler Temperature Sensor (GCTS) Location 3–3,
3–4
Evaporator Coil Heaters 7–14
General Description 3–1
Evaporator Coil Heaters Electrical Data 3–10
General Safety Notices 1–1
Evaporator Coil Remove and Replace 7–14
Evaporator Description 2–3 Generator Protection 4–11
Evaporator Fan And Motor Assembly 7–16
Evaporator Fan Assembly Procedure 7–18 H
Evaporator Fan Disassembly Procedure 7–17 Handles 2–4
Evaporator Fan Motors (EM) 4–8 Handling Modules 7–23
Evaporator Fan Motors (MS) Electrical Data 3–11 Heater Termination Thermostat (HTT) Electrical Data 3–
Evaporator Fan Motors Location 3–2 8
Evaporator Flow Problems 6–4 Heater Termination Thermostat (HTT) Location 3–2
Evaporator Heaters Megger Testing 7–15 High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV) Location 3–3,
Evaporator Refrigeration Circuit 3–12 3–4, 7–5
Evaporator Section Components 3–2 High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV) Refrigeration
Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1) Location 3–2 Circuit 3–12
Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1) Re-installing 7– High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV) Refrigeration
42 Data 3–8
High Pressure Expansion Valve (HPXV) Stepper Motor
3–13
F
High Pressure Switch (HPS) Checking the Switch 7–11
F1, F2, F3A, F3B 3–11 High Pressure Switch (HPS) Location 3–3, 3–4
Failure Action Cd29 4–10 High Pressure Switch (HPS) Refrigeration Data 3–8

T-370 Index–2
High Pressure Switch (HPS) Replacing the Switch 7–11 Pressure Relief Valves (PRV) High Side Location 3–3,
High Pressure Switch (HPS) Service 7–11 3–4
High Speed Contactor (GF) 4–8 Pressure Relief Valves (PRV) Low Side Location 3–3, 3–
Humidity Sensor (HS) Electrical Data 3–11 4
Humidity Sensor (HS) Location 3–2 Pressure Relief Valves (PRV) Service 7–12
Humidity Sensor (HS) Troubleshooting 7–20 Pressure Transducer 7–12
Pre-Trip Diagnosis 5–4
I Pre-Trip Diagnostics 4–12
Pre-Trip Terminating 4–13
Inspect Inside Unit 5–1 Pre-Trip Test Codes 4–47
Interrogator 2–3 Probe Diagnostic Logic 5–6
Interrogator Connector Location 3–2 Protection Modes Of Operation 4–10
Introduction 2–1, 9–1
R
K
R-744 3–9
Keypad 4–1 Refrigerant Charging (Vapor) 7–5
Refrigerant Description 2–1
L Refrigerant Leak Checking 7–4
Labels 2–4 Refrigerant Removing Charge 7–3
Loading Configuration Software 7–25 Refrigerant Service Gauge Set 7–1
Loading Operational Software 7–25 Refrigerant, Charge for R-744 3–9
Lockout / Tagout (LO/TO) 1–6 Refrigeration Circuit Overview 3–12
Refrigeration Circuit Schematic (Air-Cooled) 3–14, 3–15
Refrigeration Circuit Schematic (Water-Cooled) 3–16, 3–
M 17
Maintenance Of Painted Surfaces 7–44 Refrigeration Data 3–8
Maintenance Precautions 1–1 Refrigeration Unit Front Section 3–1
Manifold Gauge Valve 7–3 Remote Monitoring 2–4
Manual Test Operation 4–13 Removing Service Gauges 7–3
Manually Opening Solenoid / Expansion Valves 7–3 Results Reporting 4–13
Micro-Link 3 Controller 4–3 Return Recorder Sensor (RRS) Location 3–2
ML3 Controller 4–3 Return Recorder Sensor (RRS) Re-installing 7–41
Return Temperature Sensor (RTS) DTS Failure 4–10
O Return Temperature Sensor (RTS) Location 3–2
Return Temperature Sensor (RTS) Re-installing 7–41
Observe Unit Operation 5–6
Operating Precautions 1–1
S
Operation Checks 5–1
Operational Software (Cd Function Codes) 4–4 Safety and Protective Devices 3–12
Option Descriptions 2–4 Safety, First Aid 1–1
Optional Features 4–22 Safety, Maintenance Precautions 1–1
Safety, Operating Precautions 1–1
P Sensor Checkout Procedure 7–33
Sensor Replacement 7–40
Perishable Mode Cooling Sequence of Operation 4–5
Service Gauge Set 7–1
Perishable Mode Dehumidification 4–6
Setting the Container ID 7–26
Perishable Mode Dehumidification - Bulb Mode 4–7
Setting the Date and Time 7–26
Perishable Mode Heating Sequence of Operation 4–6
Specific Warning And Caution Statements 1–1
Perishable Mode Overview of Temperature Control 4–5
Standard Mode Overview 3–12
Plate Set 2–3
Standard Mode Refrigeration Circuit 3–12
Power 2–1
Starting the Unit 5–3
Power Cable and Plug 2–4
Start-Stop Switch 5–1, 7–3
Pressure Readout 2–3
Start-Up Inspections, Check Controller Function Codes
Pressure Relief Valves (PRV) Charge Requirements 3–9 5–4

Index–3 T-370
Start-Up Inspections, Complete Inspection 5–4 and Suction 3–13
Start-Up Inspections, DataCORDER Inspection 5–4 Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV) Location 3–1
Start-Up Inspections, Physical Inspection 5–4 Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV) Refrigeration Circuit 3–
Stopping the Unit 5–3 12
Suction (Low) Side Connection 7–1 Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV) Remove and Replace
Suction Pressure Gauge 7–1 7–22
Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT) Location 3–5 Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV) Service 7–21
Suction Pressure Valve 7–1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent 5–2
Supply Recorder Sensor (SRS) Location 3–3, 3–4 USDA Probes Locations 3–2
Supply Recorder Sensor (SRS) Re-installing 7–41 USDA Probes Option Description 2–4
Supply Temperature Sensor (STS) Location 3–3, 3–4 Utility Connection 7–1
Supply Temperature Sensor (STS) Re-installing 7–41
System Start Up 4–5 V
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Bypass 7–29
T Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Cooling Fan Remove
and Replace 7–28
Temperature Control Microprocessor System 4–1
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Description 2–3
Temperature Readout, Air 2–3
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Electrical Data 3–11
Temperature Readout, Refrigerant 2–3
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Fan Remove 7–28
Temperature Sensor Service 7–32
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Fan Replace 7–28
Test Point Descriptions 7–24
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Location 3–1
Thermometer Port 2–4
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Service 7–28
Torque Requirements 3–9
Vent Position Sensor (VPS) Description 2–4
Transducer Service 7–42
Vent Position Sensor (VPS) Electrical Data 3–11
Troubleshooting Abnormal Currents 6–5
Vent Position Sensor (VPS) Location 3–1
Troubleshooting Abnormal Noise Or Vibrations 6–3
Vent Position Sensor (VPS) Operation 5–2
Troubleshooting Abnormal Pressures 6–3
Vent Position Sensor (VPS) Service 7–32
Troubleshooting Abnormal Temperatures 6–5
Troubleshooting Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) 6–4
Troubleshooting High Pressure Expansion Valve
W
(HPXV) 6–5 Water Pressure Switch (WP) 3–9
Troubleshooting Microprocessor Malfunction 6–4 Water-Cooled Condenser (WCC) Connection 5–3
Troubleshooting No Evaporator Air Flow Or Restricted Water-Cooled Condenser (WCC) Section 3–8
Air Flow 6–4 Wire Harness Connectors 4–3
Troubleshooting Unit Operates Long Or Continuously In
Cooling 6–1
Troubleshooting Unit Runs But Has Insufficient Cooling
6–2
Troubleshooting Unit Will Not Defrost Properly 6–3
Troubleshooting Unit Will Not Heat Or Has Insufficient
Heating 6–2
Troubleshooting Unit Will Not Start Or Starts Then Stops
6–1
Troubleshooting Unit Will Not Terminate Heating 6–2

U
Unit Model Number 2–1
Unit Weight 3–9
Unloaded Mode Overview 3–13
Unloaded Mode Refrigeration Circuit 3–12
Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV) Coil Remove and Repla-
cel 7–22
Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV) Electrical Data 3–11
Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV) First Stage Discharge

T-370 Index–4
 Carrier Transicold Division,
Carrier Corporation
P.O. Box 4805
Syracuse, NY 13221 USA

https://www.carrier.com/container-refrigeration